blob: dbc5c33ddff8a6af114071c0f07268e076288526 [file] [log] [blame]
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +00001/*===-- clang-c/Index.h - Indexing Public C Interface -------------*- C -*-===*\
2|* *|
3|* The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure *|
4|* *|
5|* This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source *|
6|* License. See LICENSE.TXT for details. *|
7|* *|
8|*===----------------------------------------------------------------------===*|
9|* *|
10|* This header provides a public inferface to a Clang library for extracting *|
11|* high-level symbol information from source files without exposing the full *|
12|* Clang C++ API. *|
13|* *|
14\*===----------------------------------------------------------------------===*/
15
Benjamin Kramer2f5db8b2014-08-13 16:25:19 +000016#ifndef LLVM_CLANG_C_INDEX_H
17#define LLVM_CLANG_C_INDEX_H
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +000018
Chandler Carruthaacafe52009-12-17 09:27:29 +000019#include <time.h>
Steve Naroff6231f182009-10-27 14:35:18 +000020
Arnaud A. de Grandmaison0271b322012-06-28 22:01:06 +000021#include "clang-c/Platform.h"
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0b9682e2014-02-25 03:59:23 +000022#include "clang-c/CXErrorCode.h"
Arnaud A. de Grandmaison0271b322012-06-28 22:01:06 +000023#include "clang-c/CXString.h"
Argyrios Kyrtzidis09a439d2014-02-25 03:59:16 +000024#include "clang-c/BuildSystem.h"
Arnaud A. de Grandmaison0271b322012-06-28 22:01:06 +000025
Argyrios Kyrtzidis1c4db8d2012-11-06 21:21:49 +000026/**
27 * \brief The version constants for the libclang API.
28 * CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR should increase when there are API additions.
29 * CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR is intended for "major" source/ABI breaking changes.
30 *
31 * The policy about the libclang API was always to keep it source and ABI
32 * compatible, thus CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR is expected to remain stable.
33 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5b216ed2012-10-29 23:24:44 +000034#define CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR 0
Manman Ren400e4c32016-06-03 23:11:41 +000035#define CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR 35
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5b216ed2012-10-29 23:24:44 +000036
37#define CINDEX_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor) ( \
38 ((major) * 10000) \
39 + ((minor) * 1))
40
41#define CINDEX_VERSION CINDEX_VERSION_ENCODE( \
42 CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR, \
43 CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR )
44
45#define CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE_(major, minor) \
46 #major"."#minor
47#define CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE(major, minor) \
48 CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE_(major, minor)
49
50#define CINDEX_VERSION_STRING CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE( \
51 CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR, \
52 CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR)
53
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +000054#ifdef __cplusplus
55extern "C" {
56#endif
57
Douglas Gregor4a4e0eb2011-02-23 17:45:25 +000058/** \defgroup CINDEX libclang: C Interface to Clang
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +000059 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000060 * The C Interface to Clang provides a relatively small API that exposes
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +000061 * facilities for parsing source code into an abstract syntax tree (AST),
62 * loading already-parsed ASTs, traversing the AST, associating
63 * physical source locations with elements within the AST, and other
64 * facilities that support Clang-based development tools.
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +000065 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000066 * This C interface to Clang will never provide all of the information
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +000067 * representation stored in Clang's C++ AST, nor should it: the intent is to
68 * maintain an API that is relatively stable from one release to the next,
69 * providing only the basic functionality needed to support development tools.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000070 *
71 * To avoid namespace pollution, data types are prefixed with "CX" and
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +000072 * functions are prefixed with "clang_".
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +000073 *
74 * @{
75 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000076
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000077/**
78 * \brief An "index" that consists of a set of translation units that would
79 * typically be linked together into an executable or library.
80 */
81typedef void *CXIndex;
Steve Naroffd5e8e862009-08-27 19:51:58 +000082
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000083/**
84 * \brief A single translation unit, which resides in an index.
85 */
Ted Kremenek7df92ae2010-11-17 23:24:11 +000086typedef struct CXTranslationUnitImpl *CXTranslationUnit;
Steve Naroffd5e8e862009-08-27 19:51:58 +000087
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000088/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +000089 * \brief Opaque pointer representing client data that will be passed through
90 * to various callbacks and visitors.
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +000091 */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +000092typedef void *CXClientData;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +000093
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +000094/**
95 * \brief Provides the contents of a file that has not yet been saved to disk.
96 *
97 * Each CXUnsavedFile instance provides the name of a file on the
98 * system along with the current contents of that file that have not
99 * yet been saved to disk.
100 */
101struct CXUnsavedFile {
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000102 /**
103 * \brief The file whose contents have not yet been saved.
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +0000104 *
105 * This file must already exist in the file system.
106 */
107 const char *Filename;
108
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000109 /**
Douglas Gregor89a56c52010-02-27 01:32:48 +0000110 * \brief A buffer containing the unsaved contents of this file.
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +0000111 */
112 const char *Contents;
113
114 /**
Douglas Gregor89a56c52010-02-27 01:32:48 +0000115 * \brief The length of the unsaved contents of this buffer.
Douglas Gregor9485bf92009-12-02 09:21:34 +0000116 */
117 unsigned long Length;
118};
119
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000120/**
121 * \brief Describes the availability of a particular entity, which indicates
122 * whether the use of this entity will result in a warning or error due to
123 * it being deprecated or unavailable.
124 */
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000125enum CXAvailabilityKind {
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000126 /**
127 * \brief The entity is available.
128 */
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000129 CXAvailability_Available,
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000130 /**
131 * \brief The entity is available, but has been deprecated (and its use is
132 * not recommended).
133 */
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000134 CXAvailability_Deprecated,
Peter Collingbourne5caf5af2010-08-24 00:31:37 +0000135 /**
136 * \brief The entity is not available; any use of it will be an error.
137 */
Erik Verbruggen2e657ff2011-10-06 07:27:49 +0000138 CXAvailability_NotAvailable,
139 /**
140 * \brief The entity is available, but not accessible; any use of it will be
141 * an error.
142 */
143 CXAvailability_NotAccessible
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000144};
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +0000145
146/**
147 * \brief Describes a version number of the form major.minor.subminor.
148 */
149typedef struct CXVersion {
150 /**
151 * \brief The major version number, e.g., the '10' in '10.7.3'. A negative
152 * value indicates that there is no version number at all.
153 */
154 int Major;
155 /**
156 * \brief The minor version number, e.g., the '7' in '10.7.3'. This value
157 * will be negative if no minor version number was provided, e.g., for
158 * version '10'.
159 */
160 int Minor;
161 /**
162 * \brief The subminor version number, e.g., the '3' in '10.7.3'. This value
163 * will be negative if no minor or subminor version number was provided,
164 * e.g., in version '10' or '10.7'.
165 */
166 int Subminor;
167} CXVersion;
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +0000168
Douglas Gregor802f12f2010-01-20 22:28:27 +0000169/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000170 * \brief Provides a shared context for creating translation units.
171 *
172 * It provides two options:
Steve Naroff531e2842009-10-20 14:46:24 +0000173 *
174 * - excludeDeclarationsFromPCH: When non-zero, allows enumeration of "local"
175 * declarations (when loading any new translation units). A "local" declaration
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000176 * is one that belongs in the translation unit itself and not in a precompiled
Steve Naroff531e2842009-10-20 14:46:24 +0000177 * header that was used by the translation unit. If zero, all declarations
178 * will be enumerated.
179 *
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000180 * Here is an example:
181 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000182 * \code
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000183 * // excludeDeclsFromPCH = 1, displayDiagnostics=1
184 * Idx = clang_createIndex(1, 1);
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000185 *
186 * // IndexTest.pch was produced with the following command:
187 * // "clang -x c IndexTest.h -emit-ast -o IndexTest.pch"
188 * TU = clang_createTranslationUnit(Idx, "IndexTest.pch");
189 *
190 * // This will load all the symbols from 'IndexTest.pch'
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000191 * clang_visitChildren(clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(TU),
Douglas Gregor990b5762010-01-20 21:37:00 +0000192 * TranslationUnitVisitor, 0);
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000193 * clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU);
194 *
195 * // This will load all the symbols from 'IndexTest.c', excluding symbols
196 * // from 'IndexTest.pch'.
Daniel Dunbard0159262010-01-25 00:43:14 +0000197 * char *args[] = { "-Xclang", "-include-pch=IndexTest.pch" };
198 * TU = clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile(Idx, "IndexTest.c", 2, args,
199 * 0, 0);
Douglas Gregorfed36b12010-01-20 23:57:43 +0000200 * clang_visitChildren(clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(TU),
201 * TranslationUnitVisitor, 0);
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000202 * clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU);
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000203 * \endcode
Steve Naroffbb4568a2009-10-20 16:36:34 +0000204 *
205 * This process of creating the 'pch', loading it separately, and using it (via
206 * -include-pch) allows 'excludeDeclsFromPCH' to remove redundant callbacks
207 * (which gives the indexer the same performance benefit as the compiler).
Steve Naroff531e2842009-10-20 14:46:24 +0000208 */
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000209CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIndex clang_createIndex(int excludeDeclarationsFromPCH,
210 int displayDiagnostics);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000211
Douglas Gregor408bb742010-02-08 23:03:06 +0000212/**
213 * \brief Destroy the given index.
214 *
215 * The index must not be destroyed until all of the translation units created
216 * within that index have been destroyed.
217 */
Daniel Dunbar11089662009-12-03 01:54:28 +0000218CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeIndex(CXIndex index);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000219
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000220typedef enum {
221 /**
222 * \brief Used to indicate that no special CXIndex options are needed.
223 */
224 CXGlobalOpt_None = 0x0,
225
226 /**
227 * \brief Used to indicate that threads that libclang creates for indexing
228 * purposes should use background priority.
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000229 *
230 * Affects #clang_indexSourceFile, #clang_indexTranslationUnit,
231 * #clang_parseTranslationUnit, #clang_saveTranslationUnit.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000232 */
233 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing = 0x1,
234
235 /**
236 * \brief Used to indicate that threads that libclang creates for editing
237 * purposes should use background priority.
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000238 *
239 * Affects #clang_reparseTranslationUnit, #clang_codeCompleteAt,
240 * #clang_annotateTokens
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000241 */
242 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForEditing = 0x2,
243
244 /**
245 * \brief Used to indicate that all threads that libclang creates should use
246 * background priority.
247 */
248 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForAll =
249 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing |
250 CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForEditing
251
252} CXGlobalOptFlags;
253
254/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000255 * \brief Sets general options associated with a CXIndex.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7317a5c2012-03-28 02:18:05 +0000256 *
257 * For example:
258 * \code
259 * CXIndex idx = ...;
260 * clang_CXIndex_setGlobalOptions(idx,
261 * clang_CXIndex_getGlobalOptions(idx) |
262 * CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing);
263 * \endcode
264 *
265 * \param options A bitmask of options, a bitwise OR of CXGlobalOpt_XXX flags.
266 */
267CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_CXIndex_setGlobalOptions(CXIndex, unsigned options);
268
269/**
270 * \brief Gets the general options associated with a CXIndex.
271 *
272 * \returns A bitmask of options, a bitwise OR of CXGlobalOpt_XXX flags that
273 * are associated with the given CXIndex object.
274 */
275CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXIndex_getGlobalOptions(CXIndex);
276
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000277/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +0000278 * \defgroup CINDEX_FILES File manipulation routines
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000279 *
280 * @{
281 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000282
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000283/**
284 * \brief A particular source file that is part of a translation unit.
285 */
286typedef void *CXFile;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000287
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000288/**
289 * \brief Retrieve the complete file and path name of the given file.
Steve Naroff6231f182009-10-27 14:35:18 +0000290 */
Ted Kremenekc560b682010-02-17 00:41:20 +0000291CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getFileName(CXFile SFile);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000292
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000293/**
294 * \brief Retrieve the last modification time of the given file.
295 */
Douglas Gregor249c1212009-10-31 15:48:08 +0000296CINDEX_LINKAGE time_t clang_getFileTime(CXFile SFile);
Steve Naroff6231f182009-10-27 14:35:18 +0000297
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000298/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisac08b262013-01-26 04:52:52 +0000299 * \brief Uniquely identifies a CXFile, that refers to the same underlying file,
300 * across an indexing session.
301 */
302typedef struct {
303 unsigned long long data[3];
304} CXFileUniqueID;
305
306/**
307 * \brief Retrieve the unique ID for the given \c file.
308 *
309 * \param file the file to get the ID for.
310 * \param outID stores the returned CXFileUniqueID.
311 * \returns If there was a failure getting the unique ID, returns non-zero,
312 * otherwise returns 0.
313*/
314CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getFileUniqueID(CXFile file, CXFileUniqueID *outID);
315
316/**
Douglas Gregor37aa4932011-05-04 00:14:37 +0000317 * \brief Determine whether the given header is guarded against
318 * multiple inclusions, either with the conventional
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000319 * \#ifndef/\#define/\#endif macro guards or with \#pragma once.
Douglas Gregor37aa4932011-05-04 00:14:37 +0000320 */
321CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
322clang_isFileMultipleIncludeGuarded(CXTranslationUnit tu, CXFile file);
323
324/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000325 * \brief Retrieve a file handle within the given translation unit.
326 *
327 * \param tu the translation unit
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000328 *
Kelvin Li4a39add2016-07-05 05:00:15 +0000329* \param file_name the name of the file.
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000330 *
331 * \returns the file handle for the named file in the translation unit \p tu,
332 * or a NULL file handle if the file was not a part of this translation unit.
333 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000334CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_getFile(CXTranslationUnit tu,
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000335 const char *file_name);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000336
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000337/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisac3997e2014-08-16 00:26:19 +0000338 * \brief Returns non-zero if the \c file1 and \c file2 point to the same file,
339 * or they are both NULL.
340 */
341CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_File_isEqual(CXFile file1, CXFile file2);
342
343/**
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000344 * @}
345 */
346
347/**
348 * \defgroup CINDEX_LOCATIONS Physical source locations
349 *
350 * Clang represents physical source locations in its abstract syntax tree in
351 * great detail, with file, line, and column information for the majority of
352 * the tokens parsed in the source code. These data types and functions are
353 * used to represent source location information, either for a particular
354 * point in the program or for a range of points in the program, and extract
355 * specific location information from those data types.
356 *
357 * @{
358 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000359
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000360/**
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000361 * \brief Identifies a specific source location within a translation
362 * unit.
363 *
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000364 * Use clang_getExpansionLocation() or clang_getSpellingLocation()
Douglas Gregor229bebd2010-11-09 06:24:54 +0000365 * to map a source location to a particular file, line, and column.
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000366 */
367typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis49d9d0292013-01-11 22:29:47 +0000368 const void *ptr_data[2];
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000369 unsigned int_data;
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000370} CXSourceLocation;
Ted Kremeneka44d99c2010-01-05 23:18:49 +0000371
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000372/**
Daniel Dunbar02968e52010-02-14 10:02:57 +0000373 * \brief Identifies a half-open character range in the source code.
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000374 *
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000375 * Use clang_getRangeStart() and clang_getRangeEnd() to retrieve the
376 * starting and end locations from a source range, respectively.
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000377 */
378typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis49d9d0292013-01-11 22:29:47 +0000379 const void *ptr_data[2];
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000380 unsigned begin_int_data;
381 unsigned end_int_data;
Douglas Gregor49c4baf2010-01-18 22:13:09 +0000382} CXSourceRange;
Ted Kremeneka44d99c2010-01-05 23:18:49 +0000383
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000384/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000385 * \brief Retrieve a NULL (invalid) source location.
386 */
NAKAMURA Takumieacd6672013-01-10 02:12:38 +0000387CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getNullLocation(void);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000388
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000389/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000390 * \brief Determine whether two source locations, which must refer into
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000391 * the same translation unit, refer to exactly the same point in the source
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000392 * code.
393 *
394 * \returns non-zero if the source locations refer to the same location, zero
395 * if they refer to different locations.
396 */
397CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalLocations(CXSourceLocation loc1,
398 CXSourceLocation loc2);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000399
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000400/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000401 * \brief Retrieves the source location associated with a given file/line/column
402 * in a particular translation unit.
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000403 */
404CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getLocation(CXTranslationUnit tu,
405 CXFile file,
406 unsigned line,
407 unsigned column);
David Chisnall2e16ac52010-10-15 17:07:39 +0000408/**
409 * \brief Retrieves the source location associated with a given character offset
410 * in a particular translation unit.
411 */
412CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getLocationForOffset(CXTranslationUnit tu,
413 CXFile file,
414 unsigned offset);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000415
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000416/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis25f7af12013-04-12 17:06:51 +0000417 * \brief Returns non-zero if the given source location is in a system header.
418 */
419CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Location_isInSystemHeader(CXSourceLocation location);
420
421/**
Stefanus Du Toitdb51c632013-08-08 17:48:14 +0000422 * \brief Returns non-zero if the given source location is in the main file of
423 * the corresponding translation unit.
424 */
425CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Location_isFromMainFile(CXSourceLocation location);
426
427/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000428 * \brief Retrieve a NULL (invalid) source range.
429 */
NAKAMURA Takumieacd6672013-01-10 02:12:38 +0000430CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getNullRange(void);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000431
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000432/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000433 * \brief Retrieve a source range given the beginning and ending source
434 * locations.
435 */
436CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getRange(CXSourceLocation begin,
437 CXSourceLocation end);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000438
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +0000439/**
Douglas Gregor757e38b2011-07-23 19:35:14 +0000440 * \brief Determine whether two ranges are equivalent.
441 *
442 * \returns non-zero if the ranges are the same, zero if they differ.
443 */
444CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalRanges(CXSourceRange range1,
445 CXSourceRange range2);
446
447/**
Dmitri Gribenko8994e0c2012-09-13 13:11:20 +0000448 * \brief Returns non-zero if \p range is null.
Argyrios Kyrtzidise7e42912011-09-28 18:14:21 +0000449 */
Erik Verbruggend610b0f2011-10-06 12:11:57 +0000450CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Range_isNull(CXSourceRange range);
Argyrios Kyrtzidise7e42912011-09-28 18:14:21 +0000451
452/**
Douglas Gregor9bd6db52010-01-26 19:19:08 +0000453 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
454 * the given source location.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000455 *
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000456 * If the location refers into a macro expansion, retrieves the
457 * location of the macro expansion.
Douglas Gregor229bebd2010-11-09 06:24:54 +0000458 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000459 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
460 * into its parts.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000461 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000462 * \param file [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the file to which the given
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000463 * source location points.
464 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000465 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line to which the given
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000466 * source location points.
467 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000468 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column to which the given
469 * source location points.
Douglas Gregor9bd6db52010-01-26 19:19:08 +0000470 *
471 * \param offset [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the offset into the
472 * buffer to which the given source location points.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000473 */
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000474CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getExpansionLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
475 CXFile *file,
476 unsigned *line,
477 unsigned *column,
478 unsigned *offset);
479
480/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis91672b32011-09-13 21:49:08 +0000481 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
482 * the given source location, as specified in a # line directive.
483 *
484 * Example: given the following source code in a file somefile.c
485 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000486 * \code
Argyrios Kyrtzidis91672b32011-09-13 21:49:08 +0000487 * #123 "dummy.c" 1
488 *
489 * static int func(void)
490 * {
491 * return 0;
492 * }
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000493 * \endcode
Argyrios Kyrtzidis91672b32011-09-13 21:49:08 +0000494 *
495 * the location information returned by this function would be
496 *
497 * File: dummy.c Line: 124 Column: 12
498 *
499 * whereas clang_getExpansionLocation would have returned
500 *
501 * File: somefile.c Line: 3 Column: 12
502 *
503 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
504 * into its parts.
505 *
506 * \param filename [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the filename of the
507 * source location. Note that filenames returned will be for "virtual" files,
508 * which don't necessarily exist on the machine running clang - e.g. when
509 * parsing preprocessed output obtained from a different environment. If
510 * a non-NULL value is passed in, remember to dispose of the returned value
511 * using \c clang_disposeString() once you've finished with it. For an invalid
512 * source location, an empty string is returned.
513 *
514 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line number of the
515 * source location. For an invalid source location, zero is returned.
516 *
517 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column number of the
518 * source location. For an invalid source location, zero is returned.
519 */
520CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getPresumedLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
521 CXString *filename,
522 unsigned *line,
523 unsigned *column);
524
525/**
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000526 * \brief Legacy API to retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented
527 * by the given source location.
528 *
529 * This interface has been replaced by the newer interface
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000530 * #clang_getExpansionLocation(). See that interface's documentation for
Chandler Carruth4aa01ef2011-08-31 16:53:37 +0000531 * details.
532 */
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000533CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getInstantiationLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
534 CXFile *file,
535 unsigned *line,
Douglas Gregor9bd6db52010-01-26 19:19:08 +0000536 unsigned *column,
537 unsigned *offset);
Douglas Gregor47751d62010-01-26 03:07:15 +0000538
539/**
Douglas Gregor229bebd2010-11-09 06:24:54 +0000540 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
541 * the given source location.
542 *
543 * If the location refers into a macro instantiation, return where the
544 * location was originally spelled in the source file.
545 *
546 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
547 * into its parts.
548 *
549 * \param file [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the file to which the given
550 * source location points.
551 *
552 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line to which the given
553 * source location points.
554 *
555 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column to which the given
556 * source location points.
557 *
558 * \param offset [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the offset into the
559 * buffer to which the given source location points.
560 */
561CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getSpellingLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
562 CXFile *file,
563 unsigned *line,
564 unsigned *column,
565 unsigned *offset);
566
567/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis56be7162013-01-04 18:30:13 +0000568 * \brief Retrieve the file, line, column, and offset represented by
569 * the given source location.
570 *
571 * If the location refers into a macro expansion, return where the macro was
572 * expanded or where the macro argument was written, if the location points at
573 * a macro argument.
574 *
575 * \param location the location within a source file that will be decomposed
576 * into its parts.
577 *
578 * \param file [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the file to which the given
579 * source location points.
580 *
581 * \param line [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the line to which the given
582 * source location points.
583 *
584 * \param column [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the column to which the given
585 * source location points.
586 *
587 * \param offset [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the offset into the
588 * buffer to which the given source location points.
589 */
590CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getFileLocation(CXSourceLocation location,
591 CXFile *file,
592 unsigned *line,
593 unsigned *column,
594 unsigned *offset);
595
596/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000597 * \brief Retrieve a source location representing the first character within a
598 * source range.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000599 */
600CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getRangeStart(CXSourceRange range);
601
602/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +0000603 * \brief Retrieve a source location representing the last character within a
604 * source range.
Douglas Gregor4f46e782010-01-19 21:36:55 +0000605 */
606CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getRangeEnd(CXSourceRange range);
607
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000608/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000609 * \brief Identifies an array of ranges.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000610 */
611typedef struct {
612 /** \brief The number of ranges in the \c ranges array. */
613 unsigned count;
614 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000615 * \brief An array of \c CXSourceRanges.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000616 */
617 CXSourceRange *ranges;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000618} CXSourceRangeList;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000619
620/**
621 * \brief Retrieve all ranges that were skipped by the preprocessor.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000622 *
623 * The preprocessor will skip lines when they are surrounded by an
624 * if/ifdef/ifndef directive whose condition does not evaluate to true.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000625 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000626CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRangeList *clang_getSkippedRanges(CXTranslationUnit tu,
627 CXFile file);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000628
629/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000630 * \brief Destroy the given \c CXSourceRangeList.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000631 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0e282ef2013-12-06 18:55:45 +0000632CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeSourceRangeList(CXSourceRangeList *ranges);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ef57752013-12-05 08:19:32 +0000633
634/**
Douglas Gregorc8e390c2010-01-20 22:45:41 +0000635 * @}
636 */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +0000637
638/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000639 * \defgroup CINDEX_DIAG Diagnostic reporting
640 *
641 * @{
642 */
643
644/**
645 * \brief Describes the severity of a particular diagnostic.
646 */
647enum CXDiagnosticSeverity {
648 /**
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000649 * \brief A diagnostic that has been suppressed, e.g., by a command-line
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000650 * option.
651 */
652 CXDiagnostic_Ignored = 0,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000653
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000654 /**
655 * \brief This diagnostic is a note that should be attached to the
656 * previous (non-note) diagnostic.
657 */
658 CXDiagnostic_Note = 1,
659
660 /**
661 * \brief This diagnostic indicates suspicious code that may not be
662 * wrong.
663 */
664 CXDiagnostic_Warning = 2,
665
666 /**
667 * \brief This diagnostic indicates that the code is ill-formed.
668 */
669 CXDiagnostic_Error = 3,
670
671 /**
672 * \brief This diagnostic indicates that the code is ill-formed such
673 * that future parser recovery is unlikely to produce useful
674 * results.
675 */
676 CXDiagnostic_Fatal = 4
677};
678
679/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000680 * \brief A single diagnostic, containing the diagnostic's severity,
681 * location, text, source ranges, and fix-it hints.
682 */
683typedef void *CXDiagnostic;
684
685/**
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000686 * \brief A group of CXDiagnostics.
687 */
688typedef void *CXDiagnosticSet;
689
690/**
691 * \brief Determine the number of diagnostics in a CXDiagnosticSet.
692 */
693CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumDiagnosticsInSet(CXDiagnosticSet Diags);
694
695/**
696 * \brief Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given CXDiagnosticSet.
697 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000698 * \param Diags the CXDiagnosticSet to query.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000699 * \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve.
700 *
701 * \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed
702 * via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic().
703 */
704CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnostic clang_getDiagnosticInSet(CXDiagnosticSet Diags,
705 unsigned Index);
706
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000707/**
708 * \brief Describes the kind of error that occurred (if any) in a call to
709 * \c clang_loadDiagnostics.
710 */
711enum CXLoadDiag_Error {
712 /**
713 * \brief Indicates that no error occurred.
714 */
715 CXLoadDiag_None = 0,
716
717 /**
718 * \brief Indicates that an unknown error occurred while attempting to
719 * deserialize diagnostics.
720 */
721 CXLoadDiag_Unknown = 1,
722
723 /**
724 * \brief Indicates that the file containing the serialized diagnostics
725 * could not be opened.
726 */
727 CXLoadDiag_CannotLoad = 2,
728
729 /**
730 * \brief Indicates that the serialized diagnostics file is invalid or
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000731 * corrupt.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000732 */
733 CXLoadDiag_InvalidFile = 3
734};
735
736/**
737 * \brief Deserialize a set of diagnostics from a Clang diagnostics bitcode
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000738 * file.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000739 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000740 * \param file The name of the file to deserialize.
741 * \param error A pointer to a enum value recording if there was a problem
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000742 * deserializing the diagnostics.
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000743 * \param errorString A pointer to a CXString for recording the error string
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000744 * if the file was not successfully loaded.
745 *
746 * \returns A loaded CXDiagnosticSet if successful, and NULL otherwise. These
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000747 * diagnostics should be released using clang_disposeDiagnosticSet().
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000748 */
749CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnosticSet clang_loadDiagnostics(const char *file,
750 enum CXLoadDiag_Error *error,
751 CXString *errorString);
752
753/**
754 * \brief Release a CXDiagnosticSet and all of its contained diagnostics.
755 */
756CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeDiagnosticSet(CXDiagnosticSet Diags);
757
758/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +0000759 * \brief Retrieve the child diagnostics of a CXDiagnostic.
760 *
761 * This CXDiagnosticSet does not need to be released by
Sylvestre Ledrud29d97c2013-11-17 09:46:45 +0000762 * clang_disposeDiagnosticSet.
Ted Kremenekd010ba42011-11-10 08:43:12 +0000763 */
764CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnosticSet clang_getChildDiagnostics(CXDiagnostic D);
765
766/**
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +0000767 * \brief Determine the number of diagnostics produced for the given
768 * translation unit.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000769 */
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +0000770CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumDiagnostics(CXTranslationUnit Unit);
771
772/**
773 * \brief Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given translation unit.
774 *
775 * \param Unit the translation unit to query.
776 * \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve.
777 *
778 * \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed
779 * via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic().
780 */
781CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnostic clang_getDiagnostic(CXTranslationUnit Unit,
782 unsigned Index);
783
784/**
Ted Kremenekb4a8b052011-12-09 22:28:32 +0000785 * \brief Retrieve the complete set of diagnostics associated with a
786 * translation unit.
787 *
788 * \param Unit the translation unit to query.
789 */
790CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnosticSet
791 clang_getDiagnosticSetFromTU(CXTranslationUnit Unit);
792
793/**
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +0000794 * \brief Destroy a diagnostic.
795 */
796CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeDiagnostic(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000797
798/**
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000799 * \brief Options to control the display of diagnostics.
800 *
801 * The values in this enum are meant to be combined to customize the
Sylvestre Ledrud29d97c2013-11-17 09:46:45 +0000802 * behavior of \c clang_formatDiagnostic().
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000803 */
804enum CXDiagnosticDisplayOptions {
805 /**
806 * \brief Display the source-location information where the
807 * diagnostic was located.
808 *
809 * When set, diagnostics will be prefixed by the file, line, and
810 * (optionally) column to which the diagnostic refers. For example,
811 *
812 * \code
813 * test.c:28: warning: extra tokens at end of #endif directive
814 * \endcode
815 *
816 * This option corresponds to the clang flag \c -fshow-source-location.
817 */
818 CXDiagnostic_DisplaySourceLocation = 0x01,
819
820 /**
821 * \brief If displaying the source-location information of the
822 * diagnostic, also include the column number.
823 *
824 * This option corresponds to the clang flag \c -fshow-column.
825 */
826 CXDiagnostic_DisplayColumn = 0x02,
827
828 /**
829 * \brief If displaying the source-location information of the
830 * diagnostic, also include information about source ranges in a
831 * machine-parsable format.
832 *
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000833 * This option corresponds to the clang flag
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000834 * \c -fdiagnostics-print-source-range-info.
835 */
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000836 CXDiagnostic_DisplaySourceRanges = 0x04,
837
838 /**
839 * \brief Display the option name associated with this diagnostic, if any.
840 *
841 * The option name displayed (e.g., -Wconversion) will be placed in brackets
842 * after the diagnostic text. This option corresponds to the clang flag
843 * \c -fdiagnostics-show-option.
844 */
845 CXDiagnostic_DisplayOption = 0x08,
846
847 /**
848 * \brief Display the category number associated with this diagnostic, if any.
849 *
850 * The category number is displayed within brackets after the diagnostic text.
851 * This option corresponds to the clang flag
852 * \c -fdiagnostics-show-category=id.
853 */
854 CXDiagnostic_DisplayCategoryId = 0x10,
855
856 /**
857 * \brief Display the category name associated with this diagnostic, if any.
858 *
859 * The category name is displayed within brackets after the diagnostic text.
860 * This option corresponds to the clang flag
861 * \c -fdiagnostics-show-category=name.
862 */
863 CXDiagnostic_DisplayCategoryName = 0x20
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000864};
865
866/**
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000867 * \brief Format the given diagnostic in a manner that is suitable for display.
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000868 *
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000869 * This routine will format the given diagnostic to a string, rendering
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000870 * the diagnostic according to the various options given. The
871 * \c clang_defaultDiagnosticDisplayOptions() function returns the set of
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000872 * options that most closely mimics the behavior of the clang compiler.
873 *
874 * \param Diagnostic The diagnostic to print.
875 *
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000876 * \param Options A set of options that control the diagnostic display,
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000877 * created by combining \c CXDiagnosticDisplayOptions values.
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000878 *
879 * \returns A new string containing for formatted diagnostic.
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000880 */
Douglas Gregord770f732010-02-22 23:17:23 +0000881CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_formatDiagnostic(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic,
882 unsigned Options);
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000883
884/**
885 * \brief Retrieve the set of display options most similar to the
886 * default behavior of the clang compiler.
887 *
888 * \returns A set of display options suitable for use with \c
Sylvestre Ledrud29d97c2013-11-17 09:46:45 +0000889 * clang_formatDiagnostic().
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +0000890 */
891CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultDiagnosticDisplayOptions(void);
892
893/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000894 * \brief Determine the severity of the given diagnostic.
895 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000896CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXDiagnosticSeverity
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000897clang_getDiagnosticSeverity(CXDiagnostic);
898
899/**
900 * \brief Retrieve the source location of the given diagnostic.
901 *
902 * This location is where Clang would print the caret ('^') when
903 * displaying the diagnostic on the command line.
904 */
905CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getDiagnosticLocation(CXDiagnostic);
906
907/**
908 * \brief Retrieve the text of the given diagnostic.
909 */
910CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticSpelling(CXDiagnostic);
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000911
912/**
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000913 * \brief Retrieve the name of the command-line option that enabled this
914 * diagnostic.
915 *
916 * \param Diag The diagnostic to be queried.
917 *
918 * \param Disable If non-NULL, will be set to the option that disables this
919 * diagnostic (if any).
920 *
921 * \returns A string that contains the command-line option used to enable this
922 * warning, such as "-Wconversion" or "-pedantic".
923 */
924CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticOption(CXDiagnostic Diag,
925 CXString *Disable);
926
927/**
928 * \brief Retrieve the category number for this diagnostic.
929 *
930 * Diagnostics can be categorized into groups along with other, related
931 * diagnostics (e.g., diagnostics under the same warning flag). This routine
932 * retrieves the category number for the given diagnostic.
933 *
934 * \returns The number of the category that contains this diagnostic, or zero
935 * if this diagnostic is uncategorized.
936 */
937CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getDiagnosticCategory(CXDiagnostic);
938
939/**
Ted Kremenek26a6d492012-04-12 00:03:31 +0000940 * \brief Retrieve the name of a particular diagnostic category. This
941 * is now deprecated. Use clang_getDiagnosticCategoryText()
942 * instead.
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000943 *
944 * \param Category A diagnostic category number, as returned by
945 * \c clang_getDiagnosticCategory().
946 *
947 * \returns The name of the given diagnostic category.
948 */
Ted Kremenek26a6d492012-04-12 00:03:31 +0000949CINDEX_DEPRECATED CINDEX_LINKAGE
950CXString clang_getDiagnosticCategoryName(unsigned Category);
951
952/**
953 * \brief Retrieve the diagnostic category text for a given diagnostic.
954 *
Ted Kremenek26a6d492012-04-12 00:03:31 +0000955 * \returns The text of the given diagnostic category.
956 */
957CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticCategoryText(CXDiagnostic);
Douglas Gregora750e8e2010-11-19 16:18:16 +0000958
959/**
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000960 * \brief Determine the number of source ranges associated with the given
961 * diagnostic.
962 */
963CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getDiagnosticNumRanges(CXDiagnostic);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000964
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000965/**
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000966 * \brief Retrieve a source range associated with the diagnostic.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000967 *
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000968 * A diagnostic's source ranges highlight important elements in the source
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000969 * code. On the command line, Clang displays source ranges by
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000970 * underlining them with '~' characters.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000971 *
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000972 * \param Diagnostic the diagnostic whose range is being extracted.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000973 *
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000974 * \param Range the zero-based index specifying which range to
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000975 *
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000976 * \returns the requested source range.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000977 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +0000978CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getDiagnosticRange(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic,
Douglas Gregor4b8fd6d2010-02-08 23:11:56 +0000979 unsigned Range);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000980
981/**
982 * \brief Determine the number of fix-it hints associated with the
983 * given diagnostic.
984 */
985CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getDiagnosticNumFixIts(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic);
986
987/**
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +0000988 * \brief Retrieve the replacement information for a given fix-it.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000989 *
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +0000990 * Fix-its are described in terms of a source range whose contents
991 * should be replaced by a string. This approach generalizes over
992 * three kinds of operations: removal of source code (the range covers
993 * the code to be removed and the replacement string is empty),
994 * replacement of source code (the range covers the code to be
995 * replaced and the replacement string provides the new code), and
996 * insertion (both the start and end of the range point at the
997 * insertion location, and the replacement string provides the text to
998 * insert).
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +0000999 *
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +00001000 * \param Diagnostic The diagnostic whose fix-its are being queried.
1001 *
1002 * \param FixIt The zero-based index of the fix-it.
1003 *
1004 * \param ReplacementRange The source range whose contents will be
1005 * replaced with the returned replacement string. Note that source
1006 * ranges are half-open ranges [a, b), so the source code should be
1007 * replaced from a and up to (but not including) b.
1008 *
1009 * \returns A string containing text that should be replace the source
1010 * code indicated by the \c ReplacementRange.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001011 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001012CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDiagnosticFixIt(CXDiagnostic Diagnostic,
Douglas Gregor836ec942010-02-19 18:16:06 +00001013 unsigned FixIt,
1014 CXSourceRange *ReplacementRange);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001015
1016/**
1017 * @}
1018 */
1019
1020/**
1021 * \defgroup CINDEX_TRANSLATION_UNIT Translation unit manipulation
1022 *
1023 * The routines in this group provide the ability to create and destroy
1024 * translation units from files, either by parsing the contents of the files or
1025 * by reading in a serialized representation of a translation unit.
1026 *
1027 * @{
1028 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001029
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001030/**
1031 * \brief Get the original translation unit source file name.
1032 */
1033CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
1034clang_getTranslationUnitSpelling(CXTranslationUnit CTUnit);
1035
1036/**
1037 * \brief Return the CXTranslationUnit for a given source file and the provided
1038 * command line arguments one would pass to the compiler.
1039 *
1040 * Note: The 'source_filename' argument is optional. If the caller provides a
1041 * NULL pointer, the name of the source file is expected to reside in the
1042 * specified command line arguments.
1043 *
1044 * Note: When encountered in 'clang_command_line_args', the following options
1045 * are ignored:
1046 *
1047 * '-c'
1048 * '-emit-ast'
1049 * '-fsyntax-only'
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001050 * '-o \<output file>' (both '-o' and '\<output file>' are ignored)
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001051 *
Ted Kremenekbd4972442010-11-08 04:28:51 +00001052 * \param CIdx The index object with which the translation unit will be
1053 * associated.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001054 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001055 * \param source_filename The name of the source file to load, or NULL if the
Ted Kremenekbd4972442010-11-08 04:28:51 +00001056 * source file is included in \p clang_command_line_args.
1057 *
1058 * \param num_clang_command_line_args The number of command-line arguments in
1059 * \p clang_command_line_args.
1060 *
1061 * \param clang_command_line_args The command-line arguments that would be
1062 * passed to the \c clang executable if it were being invoked out-of-process.
1063 * These command-line options will be parsed and will affect how the translation
1064 * unit is parsed. Note that the following options are ignored: '-c',
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001065 * '-emit-ast', '-fsyntax-only' (which is the default), and '-o \<output file>'.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001066 *
1067 * \param num_unsaved_files the number of unsaved file entries in \p
1068 * unsaved_files.
1069 *
1070 * \param unsaved_files the files that have not yet been saved to disk
1071 * but may be required for code completion, including the contents of
Ted Kremenekde24a942010-04-12 18:47:26 +00001072 * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by
1073 * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to
1074 * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001075 */
1076CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile(
1077 CXIndex CIdx,
1078 const char *source_filename,
1079 int num_clang_command_line_args,
Douglas Gregor57879fa2010-09-01 16:43:19 +00001080 const char * const *clang_command_line_args,
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001081 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00001082 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001083
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001084/**
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001085 * \brief Same as \c clang_createTranslationUnit2, but returns
1086 * the \c CXTranslationUnit instead of an error code. In case of an error this
1087 * routine returns a \c NULL \c CXTranslationUnit, without further detailed
1088 * error codes.
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001089 */
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001090CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_createTranslationUnit(
1091 CXIndex CIdx,
1092 const char *ast_filename);
1093
1094/**
1095 * \brief Create a translation unit from an AST file (\c -emit-ast).
1096 *
1097 * \param[out] out_TU A non-NULL pointer to store the created
1098 * \c CXTranslationUnit.
1099 *
1100 * \returns Zero on success, otherwise returns an error code.
1101 */
1102CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode clang_createTranslationUnit2(
1103 CXIndex CIdx,
1104 const char *ast_filename,
1105 CXTranslationUnit *out_TU);
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001106
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001107/**
1108 * \brief Flags that control the creation of translation units.
1109 *
1110 * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise
1111 * ORed together to specify which options should be used when
1112 * constructing the translation unit.
1113 */
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001114enum CXTranslationUnit_Flags {
1115 /**
1116 * \brief Used to indicate that no special translation-unit options are
1117 * needed.
1118 */
1119 CXTranslationUnit_None = 0x0,
1120
1121 /**
1122 * \brief Used to indicate that the parser should construct a "detailed"
1123 * preprocessing record, including all macro definitions and instantiations.
1124 *
1125 * Constructing a detailed preprocessing record requires more memory
1126 * and time to parse, since the information contained in the record
1127 * is usually not retained. However, it can be useful for
1128 * applications that require more detailed information about the
1129 * behavior of the preprocessor.
1130 */
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001131 CXTranslationUnit_DetailedPreprocessingRecord = 0x01,
1132
1133 /**
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001134 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit is incomplete.
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001135 *
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001136 * When a translation unit is considered "incomplete", semantic
1137 * analysis that is typically performed at the end of the
1138 * translation unit will be suppressed. For example, this suppresses
1139 * the completion of tentative declarations in C and of
1140 * instantiation of implicitly-instantiation function templates in
1141 * C++. This option is typically used when parsing a header with the
1142 * intent of producing a precompiled header.
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001143 */
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001144 CXTranslationUnit_Incomplete = 0x02,
Douglas Gregorbe2d8c62010-07-23 00:33:23 +00001145
1146 /**
1147 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit should be built with an
1148 * implicit precompiled header for the preamble.
1149 *
1150 * An implicit precompiled header is used as an optimization when a
1151 * particular translation unit is likely to be reparsed many times
1152 * when the sources aren't changing that often. In this case, an
1153 * implicit precompiled header will be built containing all of the
1154 * initial includes at the top of the main file (what we refer to as
1155 * the "preamble" of the file). In subsequent parses, if the
1156 * preamble or the files in it have not changed, \c
1157 * clang_reparseTranslationUnit() will re-use the implicit
1158 * precompiled header to improve parsing performance.
1159 */
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001160 CXTranslationUnit_PrecompiledPreamble = 0x04,
1161
1162 /**
1163 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit should cache some
1164 * code-completion results with each reparse of the source file.
1165 *
1166 * Caching of code-completion results is a performance optimization that
1167 * introduces some overhead to reparsing but improves the performance of
1168 * code-completion operations.
1169 */
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001170 CXTranslationUnit_CacheCompletionResults = 0x08,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001171
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001172 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001173 * \brief Used to indicate that the translation unit will be serialized with
1174 * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001175 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001176 * This option is typically used when parsing a header with the intent of
1177 * producing a precompiled header.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001178 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0db720f2012-10-11 16:05:00 +00001179 CXTranslationUnit_ForSerialization = 0x10,
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001180
1181 /**
Douglas Gregor2ed0ee12011-08-25 22:54:01 +00001182 * \brief DEPRECATED: Enabled chained precompiled preambles in C++.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001183 *
1184 * Note: this is a *temporary* option that is available only while
Douglas Gregor2ed0ee12011-08-25 22:54:01 +00001185 * we are testing C++ precompiled preamble support. It is deprecated.
Douglas Gregorf5a18542010-10-27 17:24:53 +00001186 */
Erik Verbruggen6e922512012-04-12 10:11:59 +00001187 CXTranslationUnit_CXXChainedPCH = 0x20,
1188
1189 /**
1190 * \brief Used to indicate that function/method bodies should be skipped while
1191 * parsing.
1192 *
1193 * This option can be used to search for declarations/definitions while
1194 * ignoring the usages.
1195 */
Dmitri Gribenko3292d062012-07-02 17:35:10 +00001196 CXTranslationUnit_SkipFunctionBodies = 0x40,
1197
1198 /**
1199 * \brief Used to indicate that brief documentation comments should be
1200 * included into the set of code completions returned from this translation
1201 * unit.
1202 */
Benjamin Kramer5c248d82015-12-15 09:30:31 +00001203 CXTranslationUnit_IncludeBriefCommentsInCodeCompletion = 0x80,
1204
1205 /**
1206 * \brief Used to indicate that the precompiled preamble should be created on
1207 * the first parse. Otherwise it will be created on the first reparse. This
1208 * trades runtime on the first parse (serializing the preamble takes time) for
1209 * reduced runtime on the second parse (can now reuse the preamble).
1210 */
Manuel Klimek016c0242016-03-01 10:56:19 +00001211 CXTranslationUnit_CreatePreambleOnFirstParse = 0x100,
1212
1213 /**
1214 * \brief Do not stop processing when fatal errors are encountered.
1215 *
1216 * When fatal errors are encountered while parsing a translation unit,
1217 * semantic analysis is typically stopped early when compiling code. A common
1218 * source for fatal errors are unresolvable include files. For the
1219 * purposes of an IDE, this is undesirable behavior and as much information
1220 * as possible should be reported. Use this flag to enable this behavior.
1221 */
1222 CXTranslationUnit_KeepGoing = 0x200
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001223};
1224
1225/**
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001226 * \brief Returns the set of flags that is suitable for parsing a translation
1227 * unit that is being edited.
1228 *
1229 * The set of flags returned provide options for \c clang_parseTranslationUnit()
1230 * to indicate that the translation unit is likely to be reparsed many times,
1231 * either explicitly (via \c clang_reparseTranslationUnit()) or implicitly
1232 * (e.g., by code completion (\c clang_codeCompletionAt())). The returned flag
1233 * set contains an unspecified set of optimizations (e.g., the precompiled
1234 * preamble) geared toward improving the performance of these routines. The
1235 * set of optimizations enabled may change from one version to the next.
1236 */
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001237CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultEditingTranslationUnitOptions(void);
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001238
1239/**
1240 * \brief Same as \c clang_parseTranslationUnit2, but returns
1241 * the \c CXTranslationUnit instead of an error code. In case of an error this
1242 * routine returns a \c NULL \c CXTranslationUnit, without further detailed
1243 * error codes.
1244 */
1245CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit
1246clang_parseTranslationUnit(CXIndex CIdx,
1247 const char *source_filename,
1248 const char *const *command_line_args,
1249 int num_command_line_args,
1250 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
1251 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
1252 unsigned options);
1253
Douglas Gregor4a47bca2010-08-09 22:28:58 +00001254/**
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001255 * \brief Parse the given source file and the translation unit corresponding
1256 * to that file.
1257 *
1258 * This routine is the main entry point for the Clang C API, providing the
1259 * ability to parse a source file into a translation unit that can then be
1260 * queried by other functions in the API. This routine accepts a set of
1261 * command-line arguments so that the compilation can be configured in the same
1262 * way that the compiler is configured on the command line.
1263 *
1264 * \param CIdx The index object with which the translation unit will be
1265 * associated.
1266 *
1267 * \param source_filename The name of the source file to load, or NULL if the
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001268 * source file is included in \c command_line_args.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001269 *
1270 * \param command_line_args The command-line arguments that would be
1271 * passed to the \c clang executable if it were being invoked out-of-process.
1272 * These command-line options will be parsed and will affect how the translation
1273 * unit is parsed. Note that the following options are ignored: '-c',
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001274 * '-emit-ast', '-fsyntax-only' (which is the default), and '-o \<output file>'.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001275 *
1276 * \param num_command_line_args The number of command-line arguments in
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001277 * \c command_line_args.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001278 *
1279 * \param unsaved_files the files that have not yet been saved to disk
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00001280 * but may be required for parsing, including the contents of
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001281 * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by
1282 * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to
1283 * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns.
1284 *
1285 * \param num_unsaved_files the number of unsaved file entries in \p
1286 * unsaved_files.
1287 *
1288 * \param options A bitmask of options that affects how the translation unit
1289 * is managed but not its compilation. This should be a bitwise OR of the
1290 * CXTranslationUnit_XXX flags.
1291 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001292 * \param[out] out_TU A non-NULL pointer to store the created
1293 * \c CXTranslationUnit, describing the parsed code and containing any
1294 * diagnostics produced by the compiler.
1295 *
1296 * \returns Zero on success, otherwise returns an error code.
Douglas Gregor99d2cf42010-07-21 18:52:53 +00001297 */
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001298CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode
1299clang_parseTranslationUnit2(CXIndex CIdx,
1300 const char *source_filename,
1301 const char *const *command_line_args,
1302 int num_command_line_args,
1303 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
1304 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
1305 unsigned options,
1306 CXTranslationUnit *out_TU);
1307
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001308/**
Benjamin Kramerc02670e2015-11-18 16:14:27 +00001309 * \brief Same as clang_parseTranslationUnit2 but requires a full command line
1310 * for \c command_line_args including argv[0]. This is useful if the standard
1311 * library paths are relative to the binary.
1312 */
1313CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode clang_parseTranslationUnit2FullArgv(
1314 CXIndex CIdx, const char *source_filename,
1315 const char *const *command_line_args, int num_command_line_args,
1316 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files, unsigned num_unsaved_files,
1317 unsigned options, CXTranslationUnit *out_TU);
1318
1319/**
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001320 * \brief Flags that control how translation units are saved.
1321 *
1322 * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise
1323 * ORed together to specify which options should be used when
1324 * saving the translation unit.
1325 */
1326enum CXSaveTranslationUnit_Flags {
1327 /**
1328 * \brief Used to indicate that no special saving options are needed.
1329 */
1330 CXSaveTranslationUnit_None = 0x0
1331};
1332
1333/**
1334 * \brief Returns the set of flags that is suitable for saving a translation
1335 * unit.
1336 *
1337 * The set of flags returned provide options for
1338 * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit() by default. The returned flag
1339 * set contains an unspecified set of options that save translation units with
1340 * the most commonly-requested data.
1341 */
1342CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultSaveOptions(CXTranslationUnit TU);
1343
1344/**
Douglas Gregor30c80fa2011-07-06 16:43:36 +00001345 * \brief Describes the kind of error that occurred (if any) in a call to
1346 * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit().
1347 */
1348enum CXSaveError {
1349 /**
1350 * \brief Indicates that no error occurred while saving a translation unit.
1351 */
1352 CXSaveError_None = 0,
1353
1354 /**
1355 * \brief Indicates that an unknown error occurred while attempting to save
1356 * the file.
1357 *
1358 * This error typically indicates that file I/O failed when attempting to
1359 * write the file.
1360 */
1361 CXSaveError_Unknown = 1,
1362
1363 /**
1364 * \brief Indicates that errors during translation prevented this attempt
1365 * to save the translation unit.
1366 *
1367 * Errors that prevent the translation unit from being saved can be
1368 * extracted using \c clang_getNumDiagnostics() and \c clang_getDiagnostic().
1369 */
1370 CXSaveError_TranslationErrors = 2,
1371
1372 /**
1373 * \brief Indicates that the translation unit to be saved was somehow
1374 * invalid (e.g., NULL).
1375 */
1376 CXSaveError_InvalidTU = 3
1377};
1378
1379/**
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001380 * \brief Saves a translation unit into a serialized representation of
1381 * that translation unit on disk.
1382 *
1383 * Any translation unit that was parsed without error can be saved
1384 * into a file. The translation unit can then be deserialized into a
1385 * new \c CXTranslationUnit with \c clang_createTranslationUnit() or,
1386 * if it is an incomplete translation unit that corresponds to a
1387 * header, used as a precompiled header when parsing other translation
1388 * units.
1389 *
1390 * \param TU The translation unit to save.
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001391 *
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001392 * \param FileName The file to which the translation unit will be saved.
1393 *
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001394 * \param options A bitmask of options that affects how the translation unit
1395 * is saved. This should be a bitwise OR of the
1396 * CXSaveTranslationUnit_XXX flags.
1397 *
Douglas Gregor30c80fa2011-07-06 16:43:36 +00001398 * \returns A value that will match one of the enumerators of the CXSaveError
1399 * enumeration. Zero (CXSaveError_None) indicates that the translation unit was
1400 * saved successfully, while a non-zero value indicates that a problem occurred.
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001401 */
1402CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_saveTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit TU,
Douglas Gregor6bb92ec2010-08-13 15:35:05 +00001403 const char *FileName,
1404 unsigned options);
Douglas Gregore9386682010-08-13 05:36:37 +00001405
1406/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001407 * \brief Destroy the specified CXTranslationUnit object.
1408 */
1409CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001410
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001411/**
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001412 * \brief Flags that control the reparsing of translation units.
1413 *
1414 * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise
1415 * ORed together to specify which options should be used when
1416 * reparsing the translation unit.
1417 */
1418enum CXReparse_Flags {
1419 /**
1420 * \brief Used to indicate that no special reparsing options are needed.
1421 */
1422 CXReparse_None = 0x0
1423};
1424
1425/**
1426 * \brief Returns the set of flags that is suitable for reparsing a translation
1427 * unit.
1428 *
1429 * The set of flags returned provide options for
1430 * \c clang_reparseTranslationUnit() by default. The returned flag
1431 * set contains an unspecified set of optimizations geared toward common uses
1432 * of reparsing. The set of optimizations enabled may change from one version
1433 * to the next.
1434 */
1435CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultReparseOptions(CXTranslationUnit TU);
1436
1437/**
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001438 * \brief Reparse the source files that produced this translation unit.
1439 *
1440 * This routine can be used to re-parse the source files that originally
1441 * created the given translation unit, for example because those source files
1442 * have changed (either on disk or as passed via \p unsaved_files). The
1443 * source code will be reparsed with the same command-line options as it
1444 * was originally parsed.
1445 *
1446 * Reparsing a translation unit invalidates all cursors and source locations
1447 * that refer into that translation unit. This makes reparsing a translation
1448 * unit semantically equivalent to destroying the translation unit and then
1449 * creating a new translation unit with the same command-line arguments.
1450 * However, it may be more efficient to reparse a translation
1451 * unit using this routine.
1452 *
1453 * \param TU The translation unit whose contents will be re-parsed. The
1454 * translation unit must originally have been built with
1455 * \c clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile().
1456 *
1457 * \param num_unsaved_files The number of unsaved file entries in \p
1458 * unsaved_files.
1459 *
1460 * \param unsaved_files The files that have not yet been saved to disk
1461 * but may be required for parsing, including the contents of
1462 * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by
1463 * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to
1464 * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns.
1465 *
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001466 * \param options A bitset of options composed of the flags in CXReparse_Flags.
1467 * The function \c clang_defaultReparseOptions() produces a default set of
1468 * options recommended for most uses, based on the translation unit.
1469 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001470 * \returns 0 if the sources could be reparsed. A non-zero error code will be
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001471 * returned if reparsing was impossible, such that the translation unit is
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00001472 * invalid. In such cases, the only valid call for \c TU is
1473 * \c clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU). The error codes returned by this
1474 * routine are described by the \c CXErrorCode enum.
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001475 */
1476CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_reparseTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit TU,
1477 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
Douglas Gregorde051182010-08-11 15:58:42 +00001478 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
1479 unsigned options);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001480
1481/**
1482 * \brief Categorizes how memory is being used by a translation unit.
1483 */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001484enum CXTUResourceUsageKind {
1485 CXTUResourceUsage_AST = 1,
1486 CXTUResourceUsage_Identifiers = 2,
1487 CXTUResourceUsage_Selectors = 3,
1488 CXTUResourceUsage_GlobalCompletionResults = 4,
Ted Kremenek21735e62011-04-28 04:10:31 +00001489 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManagerContentCache = 5,
Ted Kremenekf5df0ce2011-04-28 04:53:38 +00001490 CXTUResourceUsage_AST_SideTables = 6,
Ted Kremenek8d587902011-04-28 20:36:42 +00001491 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_Membuffer_Malloc = 7,
Ted Kremenek5e1ed7b2011-04-28 23:46:20 +00001492 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_Membuffer_MMap = 8,
1493 CXTUResourceUsage_ExternalASTSource_Membuffer_Malloc = 9,
1494 CXTUResourceUsage_ExternalASTSource_Membuffer_MMap = 10,
Ted Kremenek2160a0d2011-05-04 01:38:46 +00001495 CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor = 11,
1496 CXTUResourceUsage_PreprocessingRecord = 12,
Ted Kremenek120992a2011-07-26 23:46:06 +00001497 CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_DataStructures = 13,
Ted Kremenekfbcce6f2011-07-26 23:46:11 +00001498 CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch = 14,
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001499 CXTUResourceUsage_MEMORY_IN_BYTES_BEGIN = CXTUResourceUsage_AST,
1500 CXTUResourceUsage_MEMORY_IN_BYTES_END =
Ted Kremenekfbcce6f2011-07-26 23:46:11 +00001501 CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch,
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001502
1503 CXTUResourceUsage_First = CXTUResourceUsage_AST,
Ted Kremenekfbcce6f2011-07-26 23:46:11 +00001504 CXTUResourceUsage_Last = CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001505};
1506
1507/**
1508 * \brief Returns the human-readable null-terminated C string that represents
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001509 * the name of the memory category. This string should never be freed.
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001510 */
1511CINDEX_LINKAGE
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001512const char *clang_getTUResourceUsageName(enum CXTUResourceUsageKind kind);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001513
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001514typedef struct CXTUResourceUsageEntry {
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001515 /* \brief The memory usage category. */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001516 enum CXTUResourceUsageKind kind;
1517 /* \brief Amount of resources used.
1518 The units will depend on the resource kind. */
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001519 unsigned long amount;
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001520} CXTUResourceUsageEntry;
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001521
1522/**
1523 * \brief The memory usage of a CXTranslationUnit, broken into categories.
1524 */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001525typedef struct CXTUResourceUsage {
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001526 /* \brief Private data member, used for queries. */
1527 void *data;
1528
1529 /* \brief The number of entries in the 'entries' array. */
1530 unsigned numEntries;
1531
1532 /* \brief An array of key-value pairs, representing the breakdown of memory
1533 usage. */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001534 CXTUResourceUsageEntry *entries;
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001535
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001536} CXTUResourceUsage;
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001537
1538/**
1539 * \brief Return the memory usage of a translation unit. This object
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001540 * should be released with clang_disposeCXTUResourceUsage().
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001541 */
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001542CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTUResourceUsage clang_getCXTUResourceUsage(CXTranslationUnit TU);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001543
Ted Kremenek23324122011-04-20 16:41:07 +00001544CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeCXTUResourceUsage(CXTUResourceUsage usage);
Ted Kremenek83f642e2011-04-18 22:47:10 +00001545
Douglas Gregoraa21cc42010-07-19 21:46:24 +00001546/**
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001547 * @}
1548 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00001549
Douglas Gregor4f9c3762010-01-28 00:27:43 +00001550/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001551 * \brief Describes the kind of entity that a cursor refers to.
1552 */
1553enum CXCursorKind {
1554 /* Declarations */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001555 /**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001556 * \brief A declaration whose specific kind is not exposed via this
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001557 * interface.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001558 *
1559 * Unexposed declarations have the same operations as any other kind
1560 * of declaration; one can extract their location information,
1561 * spelling, find their definitions, etc. However, the specific kind
1562 * of the declaration is not reported.
1563 */
1564 CXCursor_UnexposedDecl = 1,
1565 /** \brief A C or C++ struct. */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001566 CXCursor_StructDecl = 2,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001567 /** \brief A C or C++ union. */
1568 CXCursor_UnionDecl = 3,
1569 /** \brief A C++ class. */
1570 CXCursor_ClassDecl = 4,
1571 /** \brief An enumeration. */
1572 CXCursor_EnumDecl = 5,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001573 /**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001574 * \brief A field (in C) or non-static data member (in C++) in a
1575 * struct, union, or C++ class.
1576 */
1577 CXCursor_FieldDecl = 6,
1578 /** \brief An enumerator constant. */
1579 CXCursor_EnumConstantDecl = 7,
1580 /** \brief A function. */
1581 CXCursor_FunctionDecl = 8,
1582 /** \brief A variable. */
1583 CXCursor_VarDecl = 9,
1584 /** \brief A function or method parameter. */
1585 CXCursor_ParmDecl = 10,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001586 /** \brief An Objective-C \@interface. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001587 CXCursor_ObjCInterfaceDecl = 11,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001588 /** \brief An Objective-C \@interface for a category. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001589 CXCursor_ObjCCategoryDecl = 12,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001590 /** \brief An Objective-C \@protocol declaration. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001591 CXCursor_ObjCProtocolDecl = 13,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001592 /** \brief An Objective-C \@property declaration. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001593 CXCursor_ObjCPropertyDecl = 14,
1594 /** \brief An Objective-C instance variable. */
1595 CXCursor_ObjCIvarDecl = 15,
1596 /** \brief An Objective-C instance method. */
1597 CXCursor_ObjCInstanceMethodDecl = 16,
1598 /** \brief An Objective-C class method. */
1599 CXCursor_ObjCClassMethodDecl = 17,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001600 /** \brief An Objective-C \@implementation. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001601 CXCursor_ObjCImplementationDecl = 18,
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001602 /** \brief An Objective-C \@implementation for a category. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001603 CXCursor_ObjCCategoryImplDecl = 19,
Saleem Abdulrasool993b2862015-08-12 03:21:44 +00001604 /** \brief A typedef. */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001605 CXCursor_TypedefDecl = 20,
Ted Kremenek225b8e32010-04-13 23:39:06 +00001606 /** \brief A C++ class method. */
1607 CXCursor_CXXMethod = 21,
Ted Kremenekbd67fb22010-05-06 23:38:21 +00001608 /** \brief A C++ namespace. */
1609 CXCursor_Namespace = 22,
Ted Kremenekb80cba52010-05-07 01:04:29 +00001610 /** \brief A linkage specification, e.g. 'extern "C"'. */
1611 CXCursor_LinkageSpec = 23,
Douglas Gregor12bca222010-08-31 14:41:23 +00001612 /** \brief A C++ constructor. */
1613 CXCursor_Constructor = 24,
1614 /** \brief A C++ destructor. */
1615 CXCursor_Destructor = 25,
1616 /** \brief A C++ conversion function. */
1617 CXCursor_ConversionFunction = 26,
Douglas Gregor713602b2010-08-31 17:01:39 +00001618 /** \brief A C++ template type parameter. */
1619 CXCursor_TemplateTypeParameter = 27,
1620 /** \brief A C++ non-type template parameter. */
1621 CXCursor_NonTypeTemplateParameter = 28,
1622 /** \brief A C++ template template parameter. */
1623 CXCursor_TemplateTemplateParameter = 29,
1624 /** \brief A C++ function template. */
1625 CXCursor_FunctionTemplate = 30,
Douglas Gregor1fbaeb12010-08-31 19:02:00 +00001626 /** \brief A C++ class template. */
1627 CXCursor_ClassTemplate = 31,
Douglas Gregorf96abb22010-08-31 19:31:58 +00001628 /** \brief A C++ class template partial specialization. */
1629 CXCursor_ClassTemplatePartialSpecialization = 32,
Douglas Gregora89314e2010-08-31 23:48:11 +00001630 /** \brief A C++ namespace alias declaration. */
1631 CXCursor_NamespaceAlias = 33,
Douglas Gregor01a430132010-09-01 03:07:18 +00001632 /** \brief A C++ using directive. */
1633 CXCursor_UsingDirective = 34,
Richard Smithdda56e42011-04-15 14:24:37 +00001634 /** \brief A C++ using declaration. */
Douglas Gregora9aa29c2010-09-01 19:52:22 +00001635 CXCursor_UsingDeclaration = 35,
Richard Smithdda56e42011-04-15 14:24:37 +00001636 /** \brief A C++ alias declaration */
1637 CXCursor_TypeAliasDecl = 36,
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001638 /** \brief An Objective-C \@synthesize definition. */
Douglas Gregor4cd65962011-06-03 23:08:58 +00001639 CXCursor_ObjCSynthesizeDecl = 37,
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001640 /** \brief An Objective-C \@dynamic definition. */
Douglas Gregor4cd65962011-06-03 23:08:58 +00001641 CXCursor_ObjCDynamicDecl = 38,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis12afd702011-09-30 17:58:23 +00001642 /** \brief An access specifier. */
1643 CXCursor_CXXAccessSpecifier = 39,
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001644
Ted Kremenek08de5c12010-05-19 21:51:10 +00001645 CXCursor_FirstDecl = CXCursor_UnexposedDecl,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis12afd702011-09-30 17:58:23 +00001646 CXCursor_LastDecl = CXCursor_CXXAccessSpecifier,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001647
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001648 /* References */
1649 CXCursor_FirstRef = 40, /* Decl references */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001650 CXCursor_ObjCSuperClassRef = 40,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001651 CXCursor_ObjCProtocolRef = 41,
1652 CXCursor_ObjCClassRef = 42,
1653 /**
1654 * \brief A reference to a type declaration.
1655 *
1656 * A type reference occurs anywhere where a type is named but not
1657 * declared. For example, given:
1658 *
1659 * \code
1660 * typedef unsigned size_type;
1661 * size_type size;
1662 * \endcode
1663 *
1664 * The typedef is a declaration of size_type (CXCursor_TypedefDecl),
1665 * while the type of the variable "size" is referenced. The cursor
1666 * referenced by the type of size is the typedef for size_type.
1667 */
1668 CXCursor_TypeRef = 43,
Ted Kremenekae9e2212010-08-27 21:34:58 +00001669 CXCursor_CXXBaseSpecifier = 44,
Douglas Gregora23e8f72010-08-31 20:37:03 +00001670 /**
Douglas Gregorf3af3112010-09-09 21:42:20 +00001671 * \brief A reference to a class template, function template, template
1672 * template parameter, or class template partial specialization.
Douglas Gregora23e8f72010-08-31 20:37:03 +00001673 */
1674 CXCursor_TemplateRef = 45,
Douglas Gregora89314e2010-08-31 23:48:11 +00001675 /**
1676 * \brief A reference to a namespace or namespace alias.
1677 */
1678 CXCursor_NamespaceRef = 46,
Douglas Gregorf3af3112010-09-09 21:42:20 +00001679 /**
Douglas Gregora93ab662010-09-10 00:22:18 +00001680 * \brief A reference to a member of a struct, union, or class that occurs in
1681 * some non-expression context, e.g., a designated initializer.
Douglas Gregorf3af3112010-09-09 21:42:20 +00001682 */
1683 CXCursor_MemberRef = 47,
Douglas Gregora93ab662010-09-10 00:22:18 +00001684 /**
1685 * \brief A reference to a labeled statement.
1686 *
1687 * This cursor kind is used to describe the jump to "start_over" in the
1688 * goto statement in the following example:
1689 *
1690 * \code
1691 * start_over:
1692 * ++counter;
1693 *
1694 * goto start_over;
1695 * \endcode
1696 *
1697 * A label reference cursor refers to a label statement.
1698 */
1699 CXCursor_LabelRef = 48,
1700
Douglas Gregor16a2bdd2010-09-13 22:52:57 +00001701 /**
1702 * \brief A reference to a set of overloaded functions or function templates
1703 * that has not yet been resolved to a specific function or function template.
1704 *
1705 * An overloaded declaration reference cursor occurs in C++ templates where
1706 * a dependent name refers to a function. For example:
1707 *
1708 * \code
1709 * template<typename T> void swap(T&, T&);
1710 *
1711 * struct X { ... };
1712 * void swap(X&, X&);
1713 *
1714 * template<typename T>
1715 * void reverse(T* first, T* last) {
1716 * while (first < last - 1) {
1717 * swap(*first, *--last);
1718 * ++first;
1719 * }
1720 * }
1721 *
1722 * struct Y { };
1723 * void swap(Y&, Y&);
1724 * \endcode
1725 *
1726 * Here, the identifier "swap" is associated with an overloaded declaration
1727 * reference. In the template definition, "swap" refers to either of the two
1728 * "swap" functions declared above, so both results will be available. At
1729 * instantiation time, "swap" may also refer to other functions found via
1730 * argument-dependent lookup (e.g., the "swap" function at the end of the
1731 * example).
1732 *
1733 * The functions \c clang_getNumOverloadedDecls() and
1734 * \c clang_getOverloadedDecl() can be used to retrieve the definitions
1735 * referenced by this cursor.
1736 */
1737 CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef = 49,
1738
Douglas Gregor30093832012-02-15 00:54:55 +00001739 /**
1740 * \brief A reference to a variable that occurs in some non-expression
1741 * context, e.g., a C++ lambda capture list.
1742 */
1743 CXCursor_VariableRef = 50,
1744
1745 CXCursor_LastRef = CXCursor_VariableRef,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001746
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001747 /* Error conditions */
1748 CXCursor_FirstInvalid = 70,
1749 CXCursor_InvalidFile = 70,
1750 CXCursor_NoDeclFound = 71,
1751 CXCursor_NotImplemented = 72,
Ted Kremeneke184ac52010-03-19 20:39:03 +00001752 CXCursor_InvalidCode = 73,
1753 CXCursor_LastInvalid = CXCursor_InvalidCode,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001754
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001755 /* Expressions */
1756 CXCursor_FirstExpr = 100,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001757
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001758 /**
1759 * \brief An expression whose specific kind is not exposed via this
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001760 * interface.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001761 *
1762 * Unexposed expressions have the same operations as any other kind
1763 * of expression; one can extract their location information,
1764 * spelling, children, etc. However, the specific kind of the
1765 * expression is not reported.
1766 */
1767 CXCursor_UnexposedExpr = 100,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001768
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001769 /**
1770 * \brief An expression that refers to some value declaration, such
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00001771 * as a function, variable, or enumerator.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001772 */
1773 CXCursor_DeclRefExpr = 101,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001774
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001775 /**
1776 * \brief An expression that refers to a member of a struct, union,
1777 * class, Objective-C class, etc.
1778 */
1779 CXCursor_MemberRefExpr = 102,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001780
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001781 /** \brief An expression that calls a function. */
1782 CXCursor_CallExpr = 103,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00001783
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00001784 /** \brief An expression that sends a message to an Objective-C
1785 object or class. */
1786 CXCursor_ObjCMessageExpr = 104,
Ted Kremenek33b9a422010-04-11 21:47:37 +00001787
1788 /** \brief An expression that represents a block literal. */
1789 CXCursor_BlockExpr = 105,
1790
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001791 /** \brief An integer literal.
1792 */
1793 CXCursor_IntegerLiteral = 106,
1794
1795 /** \brief A floating point number literal.
1796 */
1797 CXCursor_FloatingLiteral = 107,
1798
1799 /** \brief An imaginary number literal.
1800 */
1801 CXCursor_ImaginaryLiteral = 108,
1802
1803 /** \brief A string literal.
1804 */
1805 CXCursor_StringLiteral = 109,
1806
1807 /** \brief A character literal.
1808 */
1809 CXCursor_CharacterLiteral = 110,
1810
1811 /** \brief A parenthesized expression, e.g. "(1)".
1812 *
1813 * This AST node is only formed if full location information is requested.
1814 */
1815 CXCursor_ParenExpr = 111,
1816
1817 /** \brief This represents the unary-expression's (except sizeof and
1818 * alignof).
1819 */
1820 CXCursor_UnaryOperator = 112,
1821
1822 /** \brief [C99 6.5.2.1] Array Subscripting.
1823 */
1824 CXCursor_ArraySubscriptExpr = 113,
1825
1826 /** \brief A builtin binary operation expression such as "x + y" or
1827 * "x <= y".
1828 */
1829 CXCursor_BinaryOperator = 114,
1830
1831 /** \brief Compound assignment such as "+=".
1832 */
1833 CXCursor_CompoundAssignOperator = 115,
1834
1835 /** \brief The ?: ternary operator.
1836 */
1837 CXCursor_ConditionalOperator = 116,
1838
1839 /** \brief An explicit cast in C (C99 6.5.4) or a C-style cast in C++
1840 * (C++ [expr.cast]), which uses the syntax (Type)expr.
1841 *
1842 * For example: (int)f.
1843 */
1844 CXCursor_CStyleCastExpr = 117,
1845
1846 /** \brief [C99 6.5.2.5]
1847 */
1848 CXCursor_CompoundLiteralExpr = 118,
1849
1850 /** \brief Describes an C or C++ initializer list.
1851 */
1852 CXCursor_InitListExpr = 119,
1853
1854 /** \brief The GNU address of label extension, representing &&label.
1855 */
1856 CXCursor_AddrLabelExpr = 120,
1857
1858 /** \brief This is the GNU Statement Expression extension: ({int X=4; X;})
1859 */
1860 CXCursor_StmtExpr = 121,
1861
Benjamin Kramere56f3932011-12-23 17:00:35 +00001862 /** \brief Represents a C11 generic selection.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001863 */
1864 CXCursor_GenericSelectionExpr = 122,
1865
1866 /** \brief Implements the GNU __null extension, which is a name for a null
1867 * pointer constant that has integral type (e.g., int or long) and is the same
1868 * size and alignment as a pointer.
1869 *
1870 * The __null extension is typically only used by system headers, which define
1871 * NULL as __null in C++ rather than using 0 (which is an integer that may not
1872 * match the size of a pointer).
1873 */
1874 CXCursor_GNUNullExpr = 123,
1875
1876 /** \brief C++'s static_cast<> expression.
1877 */
1878 CXCursor_CXXStaticCastExpr = 124,
1879
1880 /** \brief C++'s dynamic_cast<> expression.
1881 */
1882 CXCursor_CXXDynamicCastExpr = 125,
1883
1884 /** \brief C++'s reinterpret_cast<> expression.
1885 */
1886 CXCursor_CXXReinterpretCastExpr = 126,
1887
1888 /** \brief C++'s const_cast<> expression.
1889 */
1890 CXCursor_CXXConstCastExpr = 127,
1891
1892 /** \brief Represents an explicit C++ type conversion that uses "functional"
1893 * notion (C++ [expr.type.conv]).
1894 *
1895 * Example:
1896 * \code
1897 * x = int(0.5);
1898 * \endcode
1899 */
1900 CXCursor_CXXFunctionalCastExpr = 128,
1901
1902 /** \brief A C++ typeid expression (C++ [expr.typeid]).
1903 */
1904 CXCursor_CXXTypeidExpr = 129,
1905
1906 /** \brief [C++ 2.13.5] C++ Boolean Literal.
1907 */
1908 CXCursor_CXXBoolLiteralExpr = 130,
1909
1910 /** \brief [C++0x 2.14.7] C++ Pointer Literal.
1911 */
1912 CXCursor_CXXNullPtrLiteralExpr = 131,
1913
1914 /** \brief Represents the "this" expression in C++
1915 */
1916 CXCursor_CXXThisExpr = 132,
1917
1918 /** \brief [C++ 15] C++ Throw Expression.
1919 *
1920 * This handles 'throw' and 'throw' assignment-expression. When
1921 * assignment-expression isn't present, Op will be null.
1922 */
1923 CXCursor_CXXThrowExpr = 133,
1924
1925 /** \brief A new expression for memory allocation and constructor calls, e.g:
1926 * "new CXXNewExpr(foo)".
1927 */
1928 CXCursor_CXXNewExpr = 134,
1929
1930 /** \brief A delete expression for memory deallocation and destructor calls,
1931 * e.g. "delete[] pArray".
1932 */
1933 CXCursor_CXXDeleteExpr = 135,
1934
Olivier Goffart692d5332016-06-09 16:16:06 +00001935 /** \brief A unary expression. (noexcept, sizeof, or other traits)
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001936 */
1937 CXCursor_UnaryExpr = 136,
1938
Douglas Gregor910c37c2011-11-11 22:35:18 +00001939 /** \brief An Objective-C string literal i.e. @"foo".
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001940 */
1941 CXCursor_ObjCStringLiteral = 137,
1942
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001943 /** \brief An Objective-C \@encode expression.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001944 */
1945 CXCursor_ObjCEncodeExpr = 138,
1946
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00001947 /** \brief An Objective-C \@selector expression.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001948 */
1949 CXCursor_ObjCSelectorExpr = 139,
1950
James Dennett1355bd12012-06-11 06:19:40 +00001951 /** \brief An Objective-C \@protocol expression.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00001952 */
1953 CXCursor_ObjCProtocolExpr = 140,
1954
1955 /** \brief An Objective-C "bridged" cast expression, which casts between
1956 * Objective-C pointers and C pointers, transferring ownership in the process.
1957 *
1958 * \code
1959 * NSString *str = (__bridge_transfer NSString *)CFCreateString();
1960 * \endcode
1961 */
1962 CXCursor_ObjCBridgedCastExpr = 141,
1963
1964 /** \brief Represents a C++0x pack expansion that produces a sequence of
1965 * expressions.
1966 *
1967 * A pack expansion expression contains a pattern (which itself is an
1968 * expression) followed by an ellipsis. For example:
1969 *
1970 * \code
1971 * template<typename F, typename ...Types>
1972 * void forward(F f, Types &&...args) {
1973 * f(static_cast<Types&&>(args)...);
1974 * }
1975 * \endcode
1976 */
1977 CXCursor_PackExpansionExpr = 142,
1978
1979 /** \brief Represents an expression that computes the length of a parameter
1980 * pack.
1981 *
1982 * \code
1983 * template<typename ...Types>
1984 * struct count {
1985 * static const unsigned value = sizeof...(Types);
1986 * };
1987 * \endcode
1988 */
1989 CXCursor_SizeOfPackExpr = 143,
1990
Douglas Gregor30093832012-02-15 00:54:55 +00001991 /* \brief Represents a C++ lambda expression that produces a local function
1992 * object.
1993 *
1994 * \code
1995 * void abssort(float *x, unsigned N) {
1996 * std::sort(x, x + N,
1997 * [](float a, float b) {
1998 * return std::abs(a) < std::abs(b);
1999 * });
2000 * }
2001 * \endcode
2002 */
2003 CXCursor_LambdaExpr = 144,
2004
Ted Kremenek77006f62012-03-06 20:06:06 +00002005 /** \brief Objective-c Boolean Literal.
2006 */
2007 CXCursor_ObjCBoolLiteralExpr = 145,
2008
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002009 /** \brief Represents the "self" expression in an Objective-C method.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisc2233be2013-04-23 17:57:17 +00002010 */
2011 CXCursor_ObjCSelfExpr = 146,
2012
Alexey Bataev1a3320e2015-08-25 14:24:04 +00002013 /** \brief OpenMP 4.0 [2.4, Array Section].
2014 */
2015 CXCursor_OMPArraySectionExpr = 147,
2016
Erik Pilkington29099de2016-07-16 00:35:23 +00002017 /** \brief Represents an @available(...) check.
2018 */
2019 CXCursor_ObjCAvailabilityCheckExpr = 148,
2020
2021 CXCursor_LastExpr = CXCursor_ObjCAvailabilityCheckExpr,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002022
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002023 /* Statements */
2024 CXCursor_FirstStmt = 200,
2025 /**
2026 * \brief A statement whose specific kind is not exposed via this
2027 * interface.
2028 *
2029 * Unexposed statements have the same operations as any other kind of
2030 * statement; one can extract their location information, spelling,
2031 * children, etc. However, the specific kind of the statement is not
2032 * reported.
2033 */
2034 CXCursor_UnexposedStmt = 200,
Douglas Gregora93ab662010-09-10 00:22:18 +00002035
2036 /** \brief A labelled statement in a function.
2037 *
2038 * This cursor kind is used to describe the "start_over:" label statement in
2039 * the following example:
2040 *
2041 * \code
2042 * start_over:
2043 * ++counter;
2044 * \endcode
2045 *
2046 */
2047 CXCursor_LabelStmt = 201,
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002048
2049 /** \brief A group of statements like { stmt stmt }.
2050 *
2051 * This cursor kind is used to describe compound statements, e.g. function
2052 * bodies.
2053 */
2054 CXCursor_CompoundStmt = 202,
2055
Benjamin Kramer2501f142013-10-20 11:47:15 +00002056 /** \brief A case statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002057 */
2058 CXCursor_CaseStmt = 203,
2059
2060 /** \brief A default statement.
2061 */
2062 CXCursor_DefaultStmt = 204,
2063
2064 /** \brief An if statement
2065 */
2066 CXCursor_IfStmt = 205,
2067
2068 /** \brief A switch statement.
2069 */
2070 CXCursor_SwitchStmt = 206,
2071
2072 /** \brief A while statement.
2073 */
2074 CXCursor_WhileStmt = 207,
2075
2076 /** \brief A do statement.
2077 */
2078 CXCursor_DoStmt = 208,
2079
2080 /** \brief A for statement.
2081 */
2082 CXCursor_ForStmt = 209,
2083
2084 /** \brief A goto statement.
2085 */
2086 CXCursor_GotoStmt = 210,
2087
2088 /** \brief An indirect goto statement.
2089 */
2090 CXCursor_IndirectGotoStmt = 211,
2091
2092 /** \brief A continue statement.
2093 */
2094 CXCursor_ContinueStmt = 212,
2095
2096 /** \brief A break statement.
2097 */
2098 CXCursor_BreakStmt = 213,
2099
2100 /** \brief A return statement.
2101 */
2102 CXCursor_ReturnStmt = 214,
2103
Chad Rosierde70e0e2012-08-25 00:11:56 +00002104 /** \brief A GCC inline assembly statement extension.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002105 */
Chad Rosierde70e0e2012-08-25 00:11:56 +00002106 CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt = 215,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5eae0732012-09-24 19:27:20 +00002107 CXCursor_AsmStmt = CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt,
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002108
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002109 /** \brief Objective-C's overall \@try-\@catch-\@finally statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002110 */
2111 CXCursor_ObjCAtTryStmt = 216,
2112
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002113 /** \brief Objective-C's \@catch statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002114 */
2115 CXCursor_ObjCAtCatchStmt = 217,
2116
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002117 /** \brief Objective-C's \@finally statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002118 */
2119 CXCursor_ObjCAtFinallyStmt = 218,
2120
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002121 /** \brief Objective-C's \@throw statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002122 */
2123 CXCursor_ObjCAtThrowStmt = 219,
2124
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002125 /** \brief Objective-C's \@synchronized statement.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002126 */
2127 CXCursor_ObjCAtSynchronizedStmt = 220,
2128
2129 /** \brief Objective-C's autorelease pool statement.
2130 */
2131 CXCursor_ObjCAutoreleasePoolStmt = 221,
2132
2133 /** \brief Objective-C's collection statement.
2134 */
2135 CXCursor_ObjCForCollectionStmt = 222,
2136
2137 /** \brief C++'s catch statement.
2138 */
2139 CXCursor_CXXCatchStmt = 223,
2140
2141 /** \brief C++'s try statement.
2142 */
2143 CXCursor_CXXTryStmt = 224,
2144
2145 /** \brief C++'s for (* : *) statement.
2146 */
2147 CXCursor_CXXForRangeStmt = 225,
2148
2149 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's try statement.
2150 */
2151 CXCursor_SEHTryStmt = 226,
2152
2153 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's except statement.
2154 */
2155 CXCursor_SEHExceptStmt = 227,
2156
2157 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's finally statement.
2158 */
2159 CXCursor_SEHFinallyStmt = 228,
2160
Chad Rosier32503022012-06-11 20:47:18 +00002161 /** \brief A MS inline assembly statement extension.
2162 */
2163 CXCursor_MSAsmStmt = 229,
2164
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00002165 /** \brief The null statement ";": C99 6.8.3p3.
Douglas Gregor4c362d52011-10-05 19:00:14 +00002166 *
2167 * This cursor kind is used to describe the null statement.
2168 */
2169 CXCursor_NullStmt = 230,
2170
2171 /** \brief Adaptor class for mixing declarations with statements and
2172 * expressions.
2173 */
2174 CXCursor_DeclStmt = 231,
2175
Alexey Bataev5ec3eb12013-07-19 03:13:43 +00002176 /** \brief OpenMP parallel directive.
2177 */
2178 CXCursor_OMPParallelDirective = 232,
2179
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00002180 /** \brief OpenMP SIMD directive.
Alexey Bataev1b59ab52014-02-27 08:29:12 +00002181 */
2182 CXCursor_OMPSimdDirective = 233,
2183
Alexey Bataevf29276e2014-06-18 04:14:57 +00002184 /** \brief OpenMP for directive.
2185 */
2186 CXCursor_OMPForDirective = 234,
2187
Alexey Bataevd3f8dd22014-06-25 11:44:49 +00002188 /** \brief OpenMP sections directive.
2189 */
2190 CXCursor_OMPSectionsDirective = 235,
2191
Alexey Bataev1e0498a2014-06-26 08:21:58 +00002192 /** \brief OpenMP section directive.
2193 */
2194 CXCursor_OMPSectionDirective = 236,
2195
Alexey Bataevd1e40fb2014-06-26 12:05:45 +00002196 /** \brief OpenMP single directive.
2197 */
2198 CXCursor_OMPSingleDirective = 237,
2199
Alexey Bataev4acb8592014-07-07 13:01:15 +00002200 /** \brief OpenMP parallel for directive.
2201 */
2202 CXCursor_OMPParallelForDirective = 238,
2203
Alexey Bataev84d0b3e2014-07-08 08:12:03 +00002204 /** \brief OpenMP parallel sections directive.
2205 */
2206 CXCursor_OMPParallelSectionsDirective = 239,
2207
Alexey Bataev9c2e8ee2014-07-11 11:25:16 +00002208 /** \brief OpenMP task directive.
2209 */
2210 CXCursor_OMPTaskDirective = 240,
2211
Alexander Musman80c22892014-07-17 08:54:58 +00002212 /** \brief OpenMP master directive.
2213 */
2214 CXCursor_OMPMasterDirective = 241,
2215
Alexander Musmand9ed09f2014-07-21 09:42:05 +00002216 /** \brief OpenMP critical directive.
2217 */
2218 CXCursor_OMPCriticalDirective = 242,
2219
Alexey Bataev68446b72014-07-18 07:47:19 +00002220 /** \brief OpenMP taskyield directive.
2221 */
Alexander Musmand9ed09f2014-07-21 09:42:05 +00002222 CXCursor_OMPTaskyieldDirective = 243,
Alexey Bataev68446b72014-07-18 07:47:19 +00002223
Alexey Bataev4d1dfea2014-07-18 09:11:51 +00002224 /** \brief OpenMP barrier directive.
2225 */
Alexander Musmand9ed09f2014-07-21 09:42:05 +00002226 CXCursor_OMPBarrierDirective = 244,
Alexey Bataev4d1dfea2014-07-18 09:11:51 +00002227
Alexey Bataev2df347a2014-07-18 10:17:07 +00002228 /** \brief OpenMP taskwait directive.
2229 */
Alexander Musmand9ed09f2014-07-21 09:42:05 +00002230 CXCursor_OMPTaskwaitDirective = 245,
Alexey Bataev2df347a2014-07-18 10:17:07 +00002231
Alexey Bataev6125da92014-07-21 11:26:11 +00002232 /** \brief OpenMP flush directive.
2233 */
2234 CXCursor_OMPFlushDirective = 246,
Alexey Bataev0162e452014-07-22 10:10:35 +00002235
Reid Klecknerba764482014-07-24 18:22:15 +00002236 /** \brief Windows Structured Exception Handling's leave statement.
2237 */
2238 CXCursor_SEHLeaveStmt = 247,
2239
Alexey Bataev9fb6e642014-07-22 06:45:04 +00002240 /** \brief OpenMP ordered directive.
2241 */
Reid Klecknerba764482014-07-24 18:22:15 +00002242 CXCursor_OMPOrderedDirective = 248,
Alexey Bataev6125da92014-07-21 11:26:11 +00002243
Alexey Bataev0162e452014-07-22 10:10:35 +00002244 /** \brief OpenMP atomic directive.
2245 */
Reid Klecknerba764482014-07-24 18:22:15 +00002246 CXCursor_OMPAtomicDirective = 249,
Alexey Bataev0162e452014-07-22 10:10:35 +00002247
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00002248 /** \brief OpenMP for SIMD directive.
Alexander Musmanf82886e2014-09-18 05:12:34 +00002249 */
2250 CXCursor_OMPForSimdDirective = 250,
2251
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00002252 /** \brief OpenMP parallel for SIMD directive.
Alexander Musmane4e893b2014-09-23 09:33:00 +00002253 */
2254 CXCursor_OMPParallelForSimdDirective = 251,
2255
Alexey Bataev0bd520b2014-09-19 08:19:49 +00002256 /** \brief OpenMP target directive.
2257 */
Alexander Musmane4e893b2014-09-23 09:33:00 +00002258 CXCursor_OMPTargetDirective = 252,
Alexey Bataev0bd520b2014-09-19 08:19:49 +00002259
Alexey Bataev13314bf2014-10-09 04:18:56 +00002260 /** \brief OpenMP teams directive.
2261 */
2262 CXCursor_OMPTeamsDirective = 253,
2263
Alexey Bataev6d4ed052015-07-01 06:57:41 +00002264 /** \brief OpenMP taskgroup directive.
Alexey Bataevc30dd2d2015-06-18 12:14:09 +00002265 */
Michael Wong65f367f2015-07-21 13:44:28 +00002266 CXCursor_OMPTaskgroupDirective = 254,
Alexey Bataevc30dd2d2015-06-18 12:14:09 +00002267
Alexey Bataev6d4ed052015-07-01 06:57:41 +00002268 /** \brief OpenMP cancellation point directive.
2269 */
Michael Wong65f367f2015-07-21 13:44:28 +00002270 CXCursor_OMPCancellationPointDirective = 255,
Alexey Bataevc30dd2d2015-06-18 12:14:09 +00002271
Alexey Bataev80909872015-07-02 11:25:17 +00002272 /** \brief OpenMP cancel directive.
2273 */
Michael Wong65f367f2015-07-21 13:44:28 +00002274 CXCursor_OMPCancelDirective = 256,
Alexey Bataev80909872015-07-02 11:25:17 +00002275
Michael Wong65f367f2015-07-21 13:44:28 +00002276 /** \brief OpenMP target data directive.
2277 */
2278 CXCursor_OMPTargetDataDirective = 257,
2279
Alexey Bataev49f6e782015-12-01 04:18:41 +00002280 /** \brief OpenMP taskloop directive.
2281 */
2282 CXCursor_OMPTaskLoopDirective = 258,
2283
Alexey Bataev0a6ed842015-12-03 09:40:15 +00002284 /** \brief OpenMP taskloop simd directive.
2285 */
2286 CXCursor_OMPTaskLoopSimdDirective = 259,
2287
Samuel Antao686c70c2016-05-26 17:30:50 +00002288 /** \brief OpenMP distribute directive.
Carlo Bertolli6200a3d2015-12-14 14:51:25 +00002289 */
2290 CXCursor_OMPDistributeDirective = 260,
2291
Samuel Antaodf67fc42016-01-19 19:15:56 +00002292 /** \brief OpenMP target enter data directive.
2293 */
2294 CXCursor_OMPTargetEnterDataDirective = 261,
2295
Samuel Antao72590762016-01-19 20:04:50 +00002296 /** \brief OpenMP target exit data directive.
2297 */
2298 CXCursor_OMPTargetExitDataDirective = 262,
2299
Arpith Chacko Jacobe955b3d2016-01-26 18:48:41 +00002300 /** \brief OpenMP target parallel directive.
2301 */
2302 CXCursor_OMPTargetParallelDirective = 263,
2303
Arpith Chacko Jacob05bebb52016-02-03 15:46:42 +00002304 /** \brief OpenMP target parallel for directive.
2305 */
2306 CXCursor_OMPTargetParallelForDirective = 264,
2307
Samuel Antao686c70c2016-05-26 17:30:50 +00002308 /** \brief OpenMP target update directive.
2309 */
2310 CXCursor_OMPTargetUpdateDirective = 265,
2311
Carlo Bertolli9925f152016-06-27 14:55:37 +00002312 /** \brief OpenMP distribute parallel for directive.
2313 */
2314 CXCursor_OMPDistributeParallelForDirective = 266,
2315
Kelvin Li4a39add2016-07-05 05:00:15 +00002316 /** \brief OpenMP distribute parallel for simd directive.
2317 */
2318 CXCursor_OMPDistributeParallelForSimdDirective = 267,
2319
Kelvin Li787f3fc2016-07-06 04:45:38 +00002320 /** \brief OpenMP distribute simd directive.
2321 */
2322 CXCursor_OMPDistributeSimdDirective = 268,
2323
Kelvin Lia579b912016-07-14 02:54:56 +00002324 /** \brief OpenMP target parallel for simd directive.
2325 */
2326 CXCursor_OMPTargetParallelForSimdDirective = 269,
2327
Kelvin Li986330c2016-07-20 22:57:10 +00002328 /** \brief OpenMP target simd directive.
2329 */
2330 CXCursor_OMPTargetSimdDirective = 270,
2331
2332 CXCursor_LastStmt = CXCursor_OMPTargetSimdDirective,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002333
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002334 /**
2335 * \brief Cursor that represents the translation unit itself.
2336 *
2337 * The translation unit cursor exists primarily to act as the root
2338 * cursor for traversing the contents of a translation unit.
2339 */
Ted Kremenekbff31432010-02-18 03:09:07 +00002340 CXCursor_TranslationUnit = 300,
2341
Bill Wendling44426052012-12-20 19:22:21 +00002342 /* Attributes */
Ted Kremenekbff31432010-02-18 03:09:07 +00002343 CXCursor_FirstAttr = 400,
2344 /**
2345 * \brief An attribute whose specific kind is not exposed via this
2346 * interface.
2347 */
2348 CXCursor_UnexposedAttr = 400,
2349
2350 CXCursor_IBActionAttr = 401,
2351 CXCursor_IBOutletAttr = 402,
Ted Kremenek26bde772010-05-19 17:38:06 +00002352 CXCursor_IBOutletCollectionAttr = 403,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2cb4e3c2011-09-13 17:39:31 +00002353 CXCursor_CXXFinalAttr = 404,
2354 CXCursor_CXXOverrideAttr = 405,
Erik Verbruggenca98f2a2011-10-13 09:41:32 +00002355 CXCursor_AnnotateAttr = 406,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002356 CXCursor_AsmLabelAttr = 407,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis16834f12013-09-25 00:14:38 +00002357 CXCursor_PackedAttr = 408,
Joey Gouly81228382014-05-01 15:41:58 +00002358 CXCursor_PureAttr = 409,
2359 CXCursor_ConstAttr = 410,
2360 CXCursor_NoDuplicateAttr = 411,
Eli Bendersky2581e662014-05-28 19:29:58 +00002361 CXCursor_CUDAConstantAttr = 412,
2362 CXCursor_CUDADeviceAttr = 413,
2363 CXCursor_CUDAGlobalAttr = 414,
2364 CXCursor_CUDAHostAttr = 415,
Eli Bendersky9b071472014-08-08 14:59:00 +00002365 CXCursor_CUDASharedAttr = 416,
Saleem Abdulrasool79c69712015-09-05 18:53:43 +00002366 CXCursor_VisibilityAttr = 417,
Saleem Abdulrasool8aa0b802015-12-10 18:45:18 +00002367 CXCursor_DLLExport = 418,
2368 CXCursor_DLLImport = 419,
2369 CXCursor_LastAttr = CXCursor_DLLImport,
Eli Bendersky2581e662014-05-28 19:29:58 +00002370
Douglas Gregor92a524f2010-03-18 00:42:48 +00002371 /* Preprocessing */
2372 CXCursor_PreprocessingDirective = 500,
Douglas Gregor06d6d322010-03-18 18:04:21 +00002373 CXCursor_MacroDefinition = 501,
Chandler Carruth9e4704a2011-07-14 08:41:15 +00002374 CXCursor_MacroExpansion = 502,
2375 CXCursor_MacroInstantiation = CXCursor_MacroExpansion,
Douglas Gregor796d76a2010-10-20 22:00:55 +00002376 CXCursor_InclusionDirective = 503,
Douglas Gregor92a524f2010-03-18 00:42:48 +00002377 CXCursor_FirstPreprocessing = CXCursor_PreprocessingDirective,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis50e5b1d2012-10-05 00:22:24 +00002378 CXCursor_LastPreprocessing = CXCursor_InclusionDirective,
2379
2380 /* Extra Declarations */
2381 /**
2382 * \brief A module import declaration.
2383 */
2384 CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl = 600,
Sergey Kalinichev8f3b1872015-11-15 13:48:32 +00002385 CXCursor_TypeAliasTemplateDecl = 601,
Olivier Goffart81978012016-06-09 16:15:55 +00002386 /**
2387 * \brief A static_assert or _Static_assert node
2388 */
2389 CXCursor_StaticAssert = 602,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis50e5b1d2012-10-05 00:22:24 +00002390 CXCursor_FirstExtraDecl = CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl,
Olivier Goffart81978012016-06-09 16:15:55 +00002391 CXCursor_LastExtraDecl = CXCursor_StaticAssert,
Francisco Lopes da Silva975a9f62015-01-21 16:24:11 +00002392
2393 /**
2394 * \brief A code completion overload candidate.
2395 */
2396 CXCursor_OverloadCandidate = 700
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002397};
2398
2399/**
2400 * \brief A cursor representing some element in the abstract syntax tree for
2401 * a translation unit.
2402 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002403 * The cursor abstraction unifies the different kinds of entities in a
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002404 * program--declaration, statements, expressions, references to declarations,
2405 * etc.--under a single "cursor" abstraction with a common set of operations.
2406 * Common operation for a cursor include: getting the physical location in
2407 * a source file where the cursor points, getting the name associated with a
2408 * cursor, and retrieving cursors for any child nodes of a particular cursor.
2409 *
2410 * Cursors can be produced in two specific ways.
2411 * clang_getTranslationUnitCursor() produces a cursor for a translation unit,
2412 * from which one can use clang_visitChildren() to explore the rest of the
2413 * translation unit. clang_getCursor() maps from a physical source location
2414 * to the entity that resides at that location, allowing one to map from the
2415 * source code into the AST.
2416 */
2417typedef struct {
2418 enum CXCursorKind kind;
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00002419 int xdata;
Dmitri Gribenkoba2f7462013-01-11 21:01:49 +00002420 const void *data[3];
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002421} CXCursor;
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002422
2423/**
2424 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_MANIP Cursor manipulations
2425 *
2426 * @{
2427 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002428
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002429/**
2430 * \brief Retrieve the NULL cursor, which represents no entity.
2431 */
2432CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getNullCursor(void);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002433
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002434/**
2435 * \brief Retrieve the cursor that represents the given translation unit.
2436 *
2437 * The translation unit cursor can be used to start traversing the
2438 * various declarations within the given translation unit.
2439 */
2440CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(CXTranslationUnit);
2441
2442/**
2443 * \brief Determine whether two cursors are equivalent.
2444 */
2445CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalCursors(CXCursor, CXCursor);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002446
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002447/**
Dmitri Gribenko8994e0c2012-09-13 13:11:20 +00002448 * \brief Returns non-zero if \p cursor is null.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd6e9fa52011-09-27 00:30:30 +00002449 */
Dmitri Gribenko8994e0c2012-09-13 13:11:20 +00002450CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_isNull(CXCursor cursor);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd6e9fa52011-09-27 00:30:30 +00002451
2452/**
Douglas Gregor06a3f302010-11-20 00:09:34 +00002453 * \brief Compute a hash value for the given cursor.
2454 */
2455CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_hashCursor(CXCursor);
2456
2457/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002458 * \brief Retrieve the kind of the given cursor.
2459 */
2460CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCursorKind clang_getCursorKind(CXCursor);
2461
2462/**
2463 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a declaration.
2464 */
2465CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isDeclaration(enum CXCursorKind);
2466
2467/**
2468 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a simple
2469 * reference.
2470 *
2471 * Note that other kinds of cursors (such as expressions) can also refer to
2472 * other cursors. Use clang_getCursorReferenced() to determine whether a
2473 * particular cursor refers to another entity.
2474 */
2475CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isReference(enum CXCursorKind);
2476
2477/**
2478 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an expression.
2479 */
2480CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isExpression(enum CXCursorKind);
2481
2482/**
2483 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a statement.
2484 */
2485CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isStatement(enum CXCursorKind);
2486
2487/**
Douglas Gregora98034a2011-07-06 03:00:34 +00002488 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an attribute.
2489 */
2490CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isAttribute(enum CXCursorKind);
2491
2492/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00002493 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor has any attributes.
2494 */
2495CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_hasAttrs(CXCursor C);
2496
2497/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002498 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an invalid
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002499 * cursor.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002500 */
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002501CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isInvalid(enum CXCursorKind);
2502
2503/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002504 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a translation
2505 * unit.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002506 */
2507CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isTranslationUnit(enum CXCursorKind);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002508
Ted Kremenekff9021b2010-03-08 21:17:29 +00002509/***
Douglas Gregor92a524f2010-03-18 00:42:48 +00002510 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor represents a preprocessing
2511 * element, such as a preprocessor directive or macro instantiation.
2512 */
2513CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isPreprocessing(enum CXCursorKind);
2514
2515/***
Ted Kremenekff9021b2010-03-08 21:17:29 +00002516 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor represents a currently
2517 * unexposed piece of the AST (e.g., CXCursor_UnexposedStmt).
2518 */
2519CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isUnexposed(enum CXCursorKind);
2520
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002521/**
Ted Kremenekfb4961d2010-03-03 06:36:57 +00002522 * \brief Describe the linkage of the entity referred to by a cursor.
2523 */
2524enum CXLinkageKind {
2525 /** \brief This value indicates that no linkage information is available
2526 * for a provided CXCursor. */
2527 CXLinkage_Invalid,
2528 /**
2529 * \brief This is the linkage for variables, parameters, and so on that
2530 * have automatic storage. This covers normal (non-extern) local variables.
2531 */
2532 CXLinkage_NoLinkage,
2533 /** \brief This is the linkage for static variables and static functions. */
2534 CXLinkage_Internal,
2535 /** \brief This is the linkage for entities with external linkage that live
2536 * in C++ anonymous namespaces.*/
2537 CXLinkage_UniqueExternal,
2538 /** \brief This is the linkage for entities with true, external linkage. */
2539 CXLinkage_External
2540};
2541
2542/**
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002543 * \brief Determine the linkage of the entity referred to by a given cursor.
Ted Kremenekfb4961d2010-03-03 06:36:57 +00002544 */
2545CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXLinkageKind clang_getCursorLinkage(CXCursor cursor);
2546
Ehsan Akhgarib743de72016-05-31 15:55:51 +00002547enum CXVisibilityKind {
2548 /** \brief This value indicates that no visibility information is available
2549 * for a provided CXCursor. */
2550 CXVisibility_Invalid,
2551
2552 /** \brief Symbol not seen by the linker. */
2553 CXVisibility_Hidden,
2554 /** \brief Symbol seen by the linker but resolves to a symbol inside this object. */
2555 CXVisibility_Protected,
2556 /** \brief Symbol seen by the linker and acts like a normal symbol. */
2557 CXVisibility_Default
2558};
2559
2560/**
2561 * \brief Describe the visibility of the entity referred to by a cursor.
2562 *
2563 * This returns the default visibility if not explicitly specified by
2564 * a visibility attribute. The default visibility may be changed by
2565 * commandline arguments.
2566 *
2567 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
2568 *
2569 * \returns The visibility of the cursor.
2570 */
2571CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXVisibilityKind clang_getCursorVisibility(CXCursor cursor);
2572
Ehsan Akhgari93697fa2015-11-23 19:56:46 +00002573/**
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +00002574 * \brief Determine the availability of the entity that this cursor refers to,
2575 * taking the current target platform into account.
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +00002576 *
2577 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
2578 *
2579 * \returns The availability of the cursor.
2580 */
2581CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXAvailabilityKind
2582clang_getCursorAvailability(CXCursor cursor);
2583
2584/**
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +00002585 * Describes the availability of a given entity on a particular platform, e.g.,
2586 * a particular class might only be available on Mac OS 10.7 or newer.
2587 */
2588typedef struct CXPlatformAvailability {
2589 /**
2590 * \brief A string that describes the platform for which this structure
2591 * provides availability information.
2592 *
Manman Renccf25bb2016-06-28 20:55:30 +00002593 * Possible values are "ios" or "macos".
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +00002594 */
2595 CXString Platform;
2596 /**
2597 * \brief The version number in which this entity was introduced.
2598 */
2599 CXVersion Introduced;
2600 /**
2601 * \brief The version number in which this entity was deprecated (but is
2602 * still available).
2603 */
2604 CXVersion Deprecated;
2605 /**
2606 * \brief The version number in which this entity was obsoleted, and therefore
2607 * is no longer available.
2608 */
2609 CXVersion Obsoleted;
2610 /**
2611 * \brief Whether the entity is unconditionally unavailable on this platform.
2612 */
2613 int Unavailable;
2614 /**
2615 * \brief An optional message to provide to a user of this API, e.g., to
2616 * suggest replacement APIs.
2617 */
2618 CXString Message;
2619} CXPlatformAvailability;
2620
2621/**
2622 * \brief Determine the availability of the entity that this cursor refers to
2623 * on any platforms for which availability information is known.
2624 *
2625 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
2626 *
2627 * \param always_deprecated If non-NULL, will be set to indicate whether the
2628 * entity is deprecated on all platforms.
2629 *
2630 * \param deprecated_message If non-NULL, will be set to the message text
2631 * provided along with the unconditional deprecation of this entity. The client
2632 * is responsible for deallocating this string.
2633 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00002634 * \param always_unavailable If non-NULL, will be set to indicate whether the
Douglas Gregord6225d32012-05-08 00:14:45 +00002635 * entity is unavailable on all platforms.
2636 *
2637 * \param unavailable_message If non-NULL, will be set to the message text
2638 * provided along with the unconditional unavailability of this entity. The
2639 * client is responsible for deallocating this string.
2640 *
2641 * \param availability If non-NULL, an array of CXPlatformAvailability instances
2642 * that will be populated with platform availability information, up to either
2643 * the number of platforms for which availability information is available (as
2644 * returned by this function) or \c availability_size, whichever is smaller.
2645 *
2646 * \param availability_size The number of elements available in the
2647 * \c availability array.
2648 *
2649 * \returns The number of platforms (N) for which availability information is
2650 * available (which is unrelated to \c availability_size).
2651 *
2652 * Note that the client is responsible for calling
2653 * \c clang_disposeCXPlatformAvailability to free each of the
2654 * platform-availability structures returned. There are
2655 * \c min(N, availability_size) such structures.
2656 */
2657CINDEX_LINKAGE int
2658clang_getCursorPlatformAvailability(CXCursor cursor,
2659 int *always_deprecated,
2660 CXString *deprecated_message,
2661 int *always_unavailable,
2662 CXString *unavailable_message,
2663 CXPlatformAvailability *availability,
2664 int availability_size);
2665
2666/**
2667 * \brief Free the memory associated with a \c CXPlatformAvailability structure.
2668 */
2669CINDEX_LINKAGE void
2670clang_disposeCXPlatformAvailability(CXPlatformAvailability *availability);
2671
2672/**
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002673 * \brief Describe the "language" of the entity referred to by a cursor.
2674 */
Reid Kleckner9e3bc722013-12-30 17:48:49 +00002675enum CXLanguageKind {
Ted Kremenekee457512010-04-14 20:58:32 +00002676 CXLanguage_Invalid = 0,
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002677 CXLanguage_C,
2678 CXLanguage_ObjC,
Ted Kremenekee457512010-04-14 20:58:32 +00002679 CXLanguage_CPlusPlus
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002680};
2681
2682/**
2683 * \brief Determine the "language" of the entity referred to by a given cursor.
2684 */
2685CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXLanguageKind clang_getCursorLanguage(CXCursor cursor);
2686
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd6e9fa52011-09-27 00:30:30 +00002687/**
2688 * \brief Returns the translation unit that a cursor originated from.
2689 */
2690CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_Cursor_getTranslationUnit(CXCursor);
2691
Ted Kremenekc0b98662013-04-24 07:17:12 +00002692/**
2693 * \brief A fast container representing a set of CXCursors.
2694 */
2695typedef struct CXCursorSetImpl *CXCursorSet;
2696
2697/**
2698 * \brief Creates an empty CXCursorSet.
2699 */
2700CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursorSet clang_createCXCursorSet(void);
2701
2702/**
2703 * \brief Disposes a CXCursorSet and releases its associated memory.
2704 */
2705CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeCXCursorSet(CXCursorSet cset);
2706
2707/**
2708 * \brief Queries a CXCursorSet to see if it contains a specific CXCursor.
2709 *
2710 * \returns non-zero if the set contains the specified cursor.
2711*/
2712CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXCursorSet_contains(CXCursorSet cset,
2713 CXCursor cursor);
2714
2715/**
2716 * \brief Inserts a CXCursor into a CXCursorSet.
2717 *
2718 * \returns zero if the CXCursor was already in the set, and non-zero otherwise.
2719*/
2720CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXCursorSet_insert(CXCursorSet cset,
2721 CXCursor cursor);
2722
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002723/**
2724 * \brief Determine the semantic parent of the given cursor.
2725 *
2726 * The semantic parent of a cursor is the cursor that semantically contains
2727 * the given \p cursor. For many declarations, the lexical and semantic parents
2728 * are equivalent (the lexical parent is returned by
2729 * \c clang_getCursorLexicalParent()). They diverge when declarations or
2730 * definitions are provided out-of-line. For example:
2731 *
2732 * \code
2733 * class C {
2734 * void f();
2735 * };
2736 *
2737 * void C::f() { }
2738 * \endcode
2739 *
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002740 * In the out-of-line definition of \c C::f, the semantic parent is
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002741 * the class \c C, of which this function is a member. The lexical parent is
2742 * the place where the declaration actually occurs in the source code; in this
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002743 * case, the definition occurs in the translation unit. In general, the
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002744 * lexical parent for a given entity can change without affecting the semantics
2745 * of the program, and the lexical parent of different declarations of the
2746 * same entity may be different. Changing the semantic parent of a declaration,
2747 * on the other hand, can have a major impact on semantics, and redeclarations
2748 * of a particular entity should all have the same semantic context.
2749 *
2750 * In the example above, both declarations of \c C::f have \c C as their
2751 * semantic context, while the lexical context of the first \c C::f is \c C
2752 * and the lexical context of the second \c C::f is the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor7ecd19e2010-12-21 07:55:45 +00002753 *
2754 * For global declarations, the semantic parent is the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002755 */
2756CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorSemanticParent(CXCursor cursor);
2757
2758/**
2759 * \brief Determine the lexical parent of the given cursor.
2760 *
2761 * The lexical parent of a cursor is the cursor in which the given \p cursor
2762 * was actually written. For many declarations, the lexical and semantic parents
2763 * are equivalent (the semantic parent is returned by
2764 * \c clang_getCursorSemanticParent()). They diverge when declarations or
2765 * definitions are provided out-of-line. For example:
2766 *
2767 * \code
2768 * class C {
2769 * void f();
2770 * };
2771 *
2772 * void C::f() { }
2773 * \endcode
2774 *
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002775 * In the out-of-line definition of \c C::f, the semantic parent is
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002776 * the class \c C, of which this function is a member. The lexical parent is
2777 * the place where the declaration actually occurs in the source code; in this
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002778 * case, the definition occurs in the translation unit. In general, the
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002779 * lexical parent for a given entity can change without affecting the semantics
2780 * of the program, and the lexical parent of different declarations of the
2781 * same entity may be different. Changing the semantic parent of a declaration,
2782 * on the other hand, can have a major impact on semantics, and redeclarations
2783 * of a particular entity should all have the same semantic context.
2784 *
2785 * In the example above, both declarations of \c C::f have \c C as their
2786 * semantic context, while the lexical context of the first \c C::f is \c C
2787 * and the lexical context of the second \c C::f is the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor7ecd19e2010-12-21 07:55:45 +00002788 *
2789 * For declarations written in the global scope, the lexical parent is
2790 * the translation unit.
Douglas Gregor0576ce72010-09-22 21:22:29 +00002791 */
2792CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorLexicalParent(CXCursor cursor);
Douglas Gregor99a26af2010-10-01 20:25:15 +00002793
2794/**
2795 * \brief Determine the set of methods that are overridden by the given
2796 * method.
2797 *
2798 * In both Objective-C and C++, a method (aka virtual member function,
2799 * in C++) can override a virtual method in a base class. For
2800 * Objective-C, a method is said to override any method in the class's
Argyrios Kyrtzidisbfb24252012-03-08 00:20:03 +00002801 * base class, its protocols, or its categories' protocols, that has the same
2802 * selector and is of the same kind (class or instance).
2803 * If no such method exists, the search continues to the class's superclass,
2804 * its protocols, and its categories, and so on. A method from an Objective-C
2805 * implementation is considered to override the same methods as its
2806 * corresponding method in the interface.
Douglas Gregor99a26af2010-10-01 20:25:15 +00002807 *
2808 * For C++, a virtual member function overrides any virtual member
2809 * function with the same signature that occurs in its base
2810 * classes. With multiple inheritance, a virtual member function can
2811 * override several virtual member functions coming from different
2812 * base classes.
2813 *
2814 * In all cases, this function determines the immediate overridden
2815 * method, rather than all of the overridden methods. For example, if
2816 * a method is originally declared in a class A, then overridden in B
2817 * (which in inherits from A) and also in C (which inherited from B),
2818 * then the only overridden method returned from this function when
2819 * invoked on C's method will be B's method. The client may then
2820 * invoke this function again, given the previously-found overridden
2821 * methods, to map out the complete method-override set.
2822 *
2823 * \param cursor A cursor representing an Objective-C or C++
2824 * method. This routine will compute the set of methods that this
2825 * method overrides.
2826 *
2827 * \param overridden A pointer whose pointee will be replaced with a
2828 * pointer to an array of cursors, representing the set of overridden
2829 * methods. If there are no overridden methods, the pointee will be
2830 * set to NULL. The pointee must be freed via a call to
2831 * \c clang_disposeOverriddenCursors().
2832 *
2833 * \param num_overridden A pointer to the number of overridden
2834 * functions, will be set to the number of overridden functions in the
2835 * array pointed to by \p overridden.
2836 */
2837CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getOverriddenCursors(CXCursor cursor,
2838 CXCursor **overridden,
2839 unsigned *num_overridden);
2840
2841/**
2842 * \brief Free the set of overridden cursors returned by \c
2843 * clang_getOverriddenCursors().
2844 */
2845CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeOverriddenCursors(CXCursor *overridden);
2846
Ted Kremenek4ed29252010-04-12 21:22:16 +00002847/**
Douglas Gregor796d76a2010-10-20 22:00:55 +00002848 * \brief Retrieve the file that is included by the given inclusion directive
2849 * cursor.
2850 */
2851CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_getIncludedFile(CXCursor cursor);
2852
2853/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002854 * @}
2855 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002856
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002857/**
2858 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_SOURCE Mapping between cursors and source code
2859 *
2860 * Cursors represent a location within the Abstract Syntax Tree (AST). These
2861 * routines help map between cursors and the physical locations where the
2862 * described entities occur in the source code. The mapping is provided in
2863 * both directions, so one can map from source code to the AST and back.
2864 *
2865 * @{
Steve Naroffa1c72842009-08-28 15:28:48 +00002866 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002867
Steve Naroff20bad0b2009-10-21 13:56:23 +00002868/**
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00002869 * \brief Map a source location to the cursor that describes the entity at that
2870 * location in the source code.
2871 *
2872 * clang_getCursor() maps an arbitrary source location within a translation
2873 * unit down to the most specific cursor that describes the entity at that
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002874 * location. For example, given an expression \c x + y, invoking
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00002875 * clang_getCursor() with a source location pointing to "x" will return the
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002876 * cursor for "x"; similarly for "y". If the cursor points anywhere between
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00002877 * "x" or "y" (e.g., on the + or the whitespace around it), clang_getCursor()
2878 * will return a cursor referring to the "+" expression.
2879 *
2880 * \returns a cursor representing the entity at the given source location, or
2881 * a NULL cursor if no such entity can be found.
Steve Naroff20bad0b2009-10-21 13:56:23 +00002882 */
Douglas Gregor816fd362010-01-22 21:44:22 +00002883CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursor(CXTranslationUnit, CXSourceLocation);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002884
Douglas Gregor66a58812010-01-18 22:46:11 +00002885/**
2886 * \brief Retrieve the physical location of the source constructor referenced
2887 * by the given cursor.
2888 *
2889 * The location of a declaration is typically the location of the name of that
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00002890 * declaration, where the name of that declaration would occur if it is
2891 * unnamed, or some keyword that introduces that particular declaration.
2892 * The location of a reference is where that reference occurs within the
Douglas Gregor66a58812010-01-18 22:46:11 +00002893 * source code.
2894 */
2895CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getCursorLocation(CXCursor);
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002896
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00002897/**
2898 * \brief Retrieve the physical extent of the source construct referenced by
Douglas Gregor33c34ac2010-01-19 00:34:46 +00002899 * the given cursor.
2900 *
2901 * The extent of a cursor starts with the file/line/column pointing at the
2902 * first character within the source construct that the cursor refers to and
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002903 * ends with the last character within that source construct. For a
Douglas Gregor33c34ac2010-01-19 00:34:46 +00002904 * declaration, the extent covers the declaration itself. For a reference,
2905 * the extent covers the location of the reference (e.g., where the referenced
2906 * entity was actually used).
2907 */
2908CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getCursorExtent(CXCursor);
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00002909
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002910/**
2911 * @}
2912 */
Ted Kremeneka5940822010-08-26 01:42:22 +00002913
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00002914/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002915 * \defgroup CINDEX_TYPES Type information for CXCursors
2916 *
2917 * @{
2918 */
2919
2920/**
2921 * \brief Describes the kind of type
2922 */
2923enum CXTypeKind {
2924 /**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00002925 * \brief Represents an invalid type (e.g., where no type is available).
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002926 */
2927 CXType_Invalid = 0,
2928
2929 /**
2930 * \brief A type whose specific kind is not exposed via this
2931 * interface.
2932 */
2933 CXType_Unexposed = 1,
2934
2935 /* Builtin types */
2936 CXType_Void = 2,
2937 CXType_Bool = 3,
2938 CXType_Char_U = 4,
2939 CXType_UChar = 5,
2940 CXType_Char16 = 6,
2941 CXType_Char32 = 7,
2942 CXType_UShort = 8,
2943 CXType_UInt = 9,
2944 CXType_ULong = 10,
2945 CXType_ULongLong = 11,
2946 CXType_UInt128 = 12,
2947 CXType_Char_S = 13,
2948 CXType_SChar = 14,
2949 CXType_WChar = 15,
2950 CXType_Short = 16,
2951 CXType_Int = 17,
2952 CXType_Long = 18,
2953 CXType_LongLong = 19,
2954 CXType_Int128 = 20,
2955 CXType_Float = 21,
2956 CXType_Double = 22,
2957 CXType_LongDouble = 23,
2958 CXType_NullPtr = 24,
2959 CXType_Overload = 25,
2960 CXType_Dependent = 26,
2961 CXType_ObjCId = 27,
2962 CXType_ObjCClass = 28,
2963 CXType_ObjCSel = 29,
Nemanja Ivanovicbb1ea2d2016-05-09 08:52:33 +00002964 CXType_Float128 = 30,
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002965 CXType_FirstBuiltin = CXType_Void,
2966 CXType_LastBuiltin = CXType_ObjCSel,
2967
2968 CXType_Complex = 100,
2969 CXType_Pointer = 101,
2970 CXType_BlockPointer = 102,
2971 CXType_LValueReference = 103,
2972 CXType_RValueReference = 104,
2973 CXType_Record = 105,
2974 CXType_Enum = 106,
2975 CXType_Typedef = 107,
2976 CXType_ObjCInterface = 108,
Ted Kremenekc1508872010-06-21 20:15:39 +00002977 CXType_ObjCObjectPointer = 109,
2978 CXType_FunctionNoProto = 110,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b0cf602011-09-27 17:44:34 +00002979 CXType_FunctionProto = 111,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002980 CXType_ConstantArray = 112,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0661a712013-07-23 17:36:21 +00002981 CXType_Vector = 113,
2982 CXType_IncompleteArray = 114,
2983 CXType_VariableArray = 115,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7a4253b2013-10-03 16:19:23 +00002984 CXType_DependentSizedArray = 116,
Sergey Kalinichevc0151202015-11-15 13:10:10 +00002985 CXType_MemberPointer = 117,
Sergey Kalinichev69770ae2016-05-03 06:58:29 +00002986 CXType_Auto = 118,
2987
2988 /**
2989 * \brief Represents a type that was referred to using an elaborated type keyword.
2990 *
2991 * E.g., struct S, or via a qualified name, e.g., N::M::type, or both.
2992 */
2993 CXType_Elaborated = 119
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00002994};
2995
2996/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00002997 * \brief Describes the calling convention of a function type
2998 */
2999enum CXCallingConv {
3000 CXCallingConv_Default = 0,
3001 CXCallingConv_C = 1,
3002 CXCallingConv_X86StdCall = 2,
3003 CXCallingConv_X86FastCall = 3,
3004 CXCallingConv_X86ThisCall = 4,
3005 CXCallingConv_X86Pascal = 5,
3006 CXCallingConv_AAPCS = 6,
3007 CXCallingConv_AAPCS_VFP = 7,
Derek Schuff3970a7e2015-01-28 20:24:52 +00003008 /* Value 8 was PnaclCall, but it was never used, so it could safely be re-used. */
Guy Benyeif0a014b2012-12-25 08:53:55 +00003009 CXCallingConv_IntelOclBicc = 9,
Charles Davisb5a214e2013-08-30 04:39:01 +00003010 CXCallingConv_X86_64Win64 = 10,
3011 CXCallingConv_X86_64SysV = 11,
Reid Klecknerd7857f02014-10-24 17:42:17 +00003012 CXCallingConv_X86VectorCall = 12,
John McCall477f2bb2016-03-03 06:39:32 +00003013 CXCallingConv_Swift = 13,
Roman Levenstein35aa5ce2016-03-16 18:00:46 +00003014 CXCallingConv_PreserveMost = 14,
3015 CXCallingConv_PreserveAll = 15,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003016
3017 CXCallingConv_Invalid = 100,
3018 CXCallingConv_Unexposed = 200
3019};
3020
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003021/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003022 * \brief The type of an element in the abstract syntax tree.
3023 *
3024 */
3025typedef struct {
3026 enum CXTypeKind kind;
3027 void *data[2];
3028} CXType;
3029
3030/**
3031 * \brief Retrieve the type of a CXCursor (if any).
3032 */
3033CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCursorType(CXCursor C);
3034
3035/**
Dmitri Gribenko00353722013-02-15 21:15:49 +00003036 * \brief Pretty-print the underlying type using the rules of the
3037 * language of the translation unit from which it came.
3038 *
3039 * If the type is invalid, an empty string is returned.
3040 */
3041CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTypeSpelling(CXType CT);
3042
3043/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003044 * \brief Retrieve the underlying type of a typedef declaration.
3045 *
3046 * If the cursor does not reference a typedef declaration, an invalid type is
3047 * returned.
3048 */
3049CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getTypedefDeclUnderlyingType(CXCursor C);
3050
3051/**
3052 * \brief Retrieve the integer type of an enum declaration.
3053 *
3054 * If the cursor does not reference an enum declaration, an invalid type is
3055 * returned.
3056 */
3057CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getEnumDeclIntegerType(CXCursor C);
3058
3059/**
3060 * \brief Retrieve the integer value of an enum constant declaration as a signed
3061 * long long.
3062 *
3063 * If the cursor does not reference an enum constant declaration, LLONG_MIN is returned.
3064 * Since this is also potentially a valid constant value, the kind of the cursor
3065 * must be verified before calling this function.
3066 */
3067CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getEnumConstantDeclValue(CXCursor C);
3068
3069/**
3070 * \brief Retrieve the integer value of an enum constant declaration as an unsigned
3071 * long long.
3072 *
3073 * If the cursor does not reference an enum constant declaration, ULLONG_MAX is returned.
3074 * Since this is also potentially a valid constant value, the kind of the cursor
3075 * must be verified before calling this function.
3076 */
3077CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned long long clang_getEnumConstantDeclUnsignedValue(CXCursor C);
3078
3079/**
Dmitri Gribenkob506ba12012-12-04 15:13:46 +00003080 * \brief Retrieve the bit width of a bit field declaration as an integer.
3081 *
3082 * If a cursor that is not a bit field declaration is passed in, -1 is returned.
3083 */
3084CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getFieldDeclBitWidth(CXCursor C);
3085
3086/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003087 * \brief Retrieve the number of non-variadic arguments associated with a given
3088 * cursor.
3089 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb2792972013-04-01 17:38:59 +00003090 * The number of arguments can be determined for calls as well as for
3091 * declarations of functions or methods. For other cursors -1 is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003092 */
3093CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getNumArguments(CXCursor C);
3094
3095/**
3096 * \brief Retrieve the argument cursor of a function or method.
3097 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb2792972013-04-01 17:38:59 +00003098 * The argument cursor can be determined for calls as well as for declarations
3099 * of functions or methods. For other cursors and for invalid indices, an
3100 * invalid cursor is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003101 */
3102CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_Cursor_getArgument(CXCursor C, unsigned i);
3103
3104/**
Eli Benderskyc27a0c42014-10-10 20:01:05 +00003105 * \brief Describes the kind of a template argument.
3106 *
3107 * See the definition of llvm::clang::TemplateArgument::ArgKind for full
3108 * element descriptions.
3109 */
3110enum CXTemplateArgumentKind {
3111 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Null,
3112 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Type,
3113 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Declaration,
3114 CXTemplateArgumentKind_NullPtr,
3115 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Integral,
3116 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Template,
3117 CXTemplateArgumentKind_TemplateExpansion,
3118 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Expression,
3119 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Pack,
3120 /* Indicates an error case, preventing the kind from being deduced. */
3121 CXTemplateArgumentKind_Invalid
3122};
3123
3124/**
3125 *\brief Returns the number of template args of a function decl representing a
3126 * template specialization.
3127 *
3128 * If the argument cursor cannot be converted into a template function
3129 * declaration, -1 is returned.
3130 *
3131 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3132 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3133 * void foo() { ... }
3134 *
3135 * template <>
3136 * void foo<float, -7, true>();
3137 *
3138 * The value 3 would be returned from this call.
3139 */
3140CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getNumTemplateArguments(CXCursor C);
3141
3142/**
3143 * \brief Retrieve the kind of the I'th template argument of the CXCursor C.
3144 *
3145 * If the argument CXCursor does not represent a FunctionDecl, an invalid
3146 * template argument kind is returned.
3147 *
3148 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3149 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3150 * void foo() { ... }
3151 *
3152 * template <>
3153 * void foo<float, -7, true>();
3154 *
3155 * For I = 0, 1, and 2, Type, Integral, and Integral will be returned,
3156 * respectively.
3157 */
3158CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXTemplateArgumentKind clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentKind(
3159 CXCursor C, unsigned I);
3160
3161/**
3162 * \brief Retrieve a CXType representing the type of a TemplateArgument of a
3163 * function decl representing a template specialization.
3164 *
3165 * If the argument CXCursor does not represent a FunctionDecl whose I'th
3166 * template argument has a kind of CXTemplateArgKind_Integral, an invalid type
3167 * is returned.
3168 *
3169 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3170 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3171 * void foo() { ... }
3172 *
3173 * template <>
3174 * void foo<float, -7, true>();
3175 *
3176 * If called with I = 0, "float", will be returned.
3177 * Invalid types will be returned for I == 1 or 2.
3178 */
3179CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentType(CXCursor C,
3180 unsigned I);
3181
3182/**
3183 * \brief Retrieve the value of an Integral TemplateArgument (of a function
3184 * decl representing a template specialization) as a signed long long.
3185 *
3186 * It is undefined to call this function on a CXCursor that does not represent a
3187 * FunctionDecl or whose I'th template argument is not an integral value.
3188 *
3189 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3190 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3191 * void foo() { ... }
3192 *
3193 * template <>
3194 * void foo<float, -7, true>();
3195 *
3196 * If called with I = 1 or 2, -7 or true will be returned, respectively.
3197 * For I == 0, this function's behavior is undefined.
3198 */
3199CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentValue(CXCursor C,
3200 unsigned I);
3201
3202/**
3203 * \brief Retrieve the value of an Integral TemplateArgument (of a function
3204 * decl representing a template specialization) as an unsigned long long.
3205 *
3206 * It is undefined to call this function on a CXCursor that does not represent a
3207 * FunctionDecl or whose I'th template argument is not an integral value.
3208 *
3209 * For example, for the following declaration and specialization:
3210 * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool>
3211 * void foo() { ... }
3212 *
3213 * template <>
3214 * void foo<float, 2147483649, true>();
3215 *
3216 * If called with I = 1 or 2, 2147483649 or true will be returned, respectively.
3217 * For I == 0, this function's behavior is undefined.
3218 */
3219CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned long long clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentUnsignedValue(
3220 CXCursor C, unsigned I);
3221
3222/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003223 * \brief Determine whether two CXTypes represent the same type.
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003224 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003225 * \returns non-zero if the CXTypes represent the same type and
3226 * zero otherwise.
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003227 */
3228CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalTypes(CXType A, CXType B);
3229
3230/**
3231 * \brief Return the canonical type for a CXType.
3232 *
3233 * Clang's type system explicitly models typedefs and all the ways
3234 * a specific type can be represented. The canonical type is the underlying
3235 * type with all the "sugar" removed. For example, if 'T' is a typedef
3236 * for 'int', the canonical type for 'T' would be 'int'.
3237 */
3238CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCanonicalType(CXType T);
3239
3240/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003241 * \brief Determine whether a CXType has the "const" qualifier set,
3242 * without looking through typedefs that may have added "const" at a
3243 * different level.
Douglas Gregor56a63802011-01-27 16:27:11 +00003244 */
3245CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isConstQualifiedType(CXType T);
3246
3247/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00003248 * \brief Determine whether a CXCursor that is a macro, is
3249 * function like.
3250 */
3251CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isMacroFunctionLike(CXCursor C);
3252
3253/**
3254 * \brief Determine whether a CXCursor that is a macro, is a
3255 * builtin one.
3256 */
3257CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isMacroBuiltin(CXCursor C);
3258
3259/**
3260 * \brief Determine whether a CXCursor that is a function declaration, is an
3261 * inline declaration.
3262 */
3263CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isFunctionInlined(CXCursor C);
3264
3265/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003266 * \brief Determine whether a CXType has the "volatile" qualifier set,
3267 * without looking through typedefs that may have added "volatile" at
3268 * a different level.
Douglas Gregor56a63802011-01-27 16:27:11 +00003269 */
3270CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isVolatileQualifiedType(CXType T);
3271
3272/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003273 * \brief Determine whether a CXType has the "restrict" qualifier set,
3274 * without looking through typedefs that may have added "restrict" at a
3275 * different level.
Douglas Gregor56a63802011-01-27 16:27:11 +00003276 */
3277CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isRestrictQualifiedType(CXType T);
3278
3279/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003280 * \brief For pointer types, returns the type of the pointee.
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003281 */
3282CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getPointeeType(CXType T);
3283
3284/**
3285 * \brief Return the cursor for the declaration of the given type.
3286 */
3287CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getTypeDeclaration(CXType T);
3288
David Chisnall50e4eba2010-12-30 14:05:53 +00003289/**
3290 * Returns the Objective-C type encoding for the specified declaration.
3291 */
3292CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDeclObjCTypeEncoding(CXCursor C);
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003293
3294/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00003295 * Returns the Objective-C type encoding for the specified CXType.
3296 */
3297CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Type_getObjCEncoding(CXType type);
3298
3299/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003300 * \brief Retrieve the spelling of a given CXTypeKind.
3301 */
3302CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTypeKindSpelling(enum CXTypeKind K);
3303
3304/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003305 * \brief Retrieve the calling convention associated with a function type.
3306 *
3307 * If a non-function type is passed in, CXCallingConv_Invalid is returned.
3308 */
3309CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCallingConv clang_getFunctionTypeCallingConv(CXType T);
3310
3311/**
Alp Toker314cc812014-01-25 16:55:45 +00003312 * \brief Retrieve the return type associated with a function type.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003313 *
3314 * If a non-function type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
Ted Kremenekc1508872010-06-21 20:15:39 +00003315 */
3316CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getResultType(CXType T);
3317
3318/**
Alp Toker601b22c2014-01-21 23:35:24 +00003319 * \brief Retrieve the number of non-variadic parameters associated with a
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003320 * function type.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003321 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003322 * If a non-function type is passed in, -1 is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003323 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c27e4b2012-04-11 19:32:19 +00003324CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getNumArgTypes(CXType T);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003325
3326/**
Alp Toker601b22c2014-01-21 23:35:24 +00003327 * \brief Retrieve the type of a parameter of a function type.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003328 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003329 * If a non-function type is passed in or the function does not have enough
3330 * parameters, an invalid type is returned.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003331 */
3332CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getArgType(CXType T, unsigned i);
3333
3334/**
3335 * \brief Return 1 if the CXType is a variadic function type, and 0 otherwise.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003336 */
3337CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isFunctionTypeVariadic(CXType T);
3338
3339/**
Alp Toker314cc812014-01-25 16:55:45 +00003340 * \brief Retrieve the return type associated with a given cursor.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003341 *
3342 * This only returns a valid type if the cursor refers to a function or method.
Ted Kremenekc62ab8d2010-06-21 20:48:56 +00003343 */
3344CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCursorResultType(CXCursor C);
3345
3346/**
Ted Kremenek0c7476a2010-07-30 00:14:11 +00003347 * \brief Return 1 if the CXType is a POD (plain old data) type, and 0
3348 * otherwise.
3349 */
3350CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isPODType(CXType T);
3351
3352/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis66f433a2011-12-06 22:05:01 +00003353 * \brief Return the element type of an array, complex, or vector type.
3354 *
3355 * If a type is passed in that is not an array, complex, or vector type,
3356 * an invalid type is returned.
3357 */
3358CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getElementType(CXType T);
3359
3360/**
3361 * \brief Return the number of elements of an array or vector type.
3362 *
3363 * If a type is passed in that is not an array or vector type,
3364 * -1 is returned.
3365 */
3366CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getNumElements(CXType T);
3367
3368/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b0cf602011-09-27 17:44:34 +00003369 * \brief Return the element type of an array type.
3370 *
3371 * If a non-array type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
3372 */
3373CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getArrayElementType(CXType T);
3374
3375/**
Sylvestre Ledru830885c2012-07-23 08:59:39 +00003376 * \brief Return the array size of a constant array.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b0cf602011-09-27 17:44:34 +00003377 *
3378 * If a non-array type is passed in, -1 is returned.
3379 */
3380CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getArraySize(CXType T);
3381
3382/**
Sergey Kalinichev69770ae2016-05-03 06:58:29 +00003383 * \brief Retrieve the type named by the qualified-id.
3384 *
3385 * If a non-elaborated type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
3386 */
3387CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getNamedType(CXType T);
3388
3389/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidise822f582013-04-11 01:20:11 +00003390 * \brief List the possible error codes for \c clang_Type_getSizeOf,
3391 * \c clang_Type_getAlignOf, \c clang_Type_getOffsetOf and
3392 * \c clang_Cursor_getOffsetOf.
3393 *
3394 * A value of this enumeration type can be returned if the target type is not
3395 * a valid argument to sizeof, alignof or offsetof.
3396 */
3397enum CXTypeLayoutError {
3398 /**
3399 * \brief Type is of kind CXType_Invalid.
3400 */
3401 CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid = -1,
3402 /**
3403 * \brief The type is an incomplete Type.
3404 */
3405 CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete = -2,
3406 /**
3407 * \brief The type is a dependent Type.
3408 */
3409 CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent = -3,
3410 /**
3411 * \brief The type is not a constant size type.
3412 */
3413 CXTypeLayoutError_NotConstantSize = -4,
3414 /**
3415 * \brief The Field name is not valid for this record.
3416 */
3417 CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName = -5
3418};
3419
3420/**
3421 * \brief Return the alignment of a type in bytes as per C++[expr.alignof]
3422 * standard.
3423 *
3424 * If the type declaration is invalid, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned.
3425 * If the type declaration is an incomplete type, CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete
3426 * is returned.
3427 * If the type declaration is a dependent type, CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is
3428 * returned.
3429 * If the type declaration is not a constant size type,
3430 * CXTypeLayoutError_NotConstantSize is returned.
3431 */
3432CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getAlignOf(CXType T);
3433
3434/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7a4253b2013-10-03 16:19:23 +00003435 * \brief Return the class type of an member pointer type.
3436 *
3437 * If a non-member-pointer type is passed in, an invalid type is returned.
3438 */
3439CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getClassType(CXType T);
3440
3441/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidise822f582013-04-11 01:20:11 +00003442 * \brief Return the size of a type in bytes as per C++[expr.sizeof] standard.
3443 *
3444 * If the type declaration is invalid, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned.
3445 * If the type declaration is an incomplete type, CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete
3446 * is returned.
3447 * If the type declaration is a dependent type, CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is
3448 * returned.
3449 */
3450CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getSizeOf(CXType T);
3451
3452/**
3453 * \brief Return the offset of a field named S in a record of type T in bits
3454 * as it would be returned by __offsetof__ as per C++11[18.2p4]
3455 *
3456 * If the cursor is not a record field declaration, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid
3457 * is returned.
3458 * If the field's type declaration is an incomplete type,
3459 * CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete is returned.
3460 * If the field's type declaration is a dependent type,
3461 * CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is returned.
3462 * If the field's name S is not found,
3463 * CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName is returned.
3464 */
3465CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getOffsetOf(CXType T, const char *S);
3466
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2bff5162015-04-13 16:55:04 +00003467/**
3468 * \brief Return the offset of the field represented by the Cursor.
3469 *
3470 * If the cursor is not a field declaration, -1 is returned.
3471 * If the cursor semantic parent is not a record field declaration,
3472 * CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned.
3473 * If the field's type declaration is an incomplete type,
3474 * CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete is returned.
3475 * If the field's type declaration is a dependent type,
3476 * CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is returned.
3477 * If the field's name S is not found,
3478 * CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName is returned.
3479 */
3480CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Cursor_getOffsetOfField(CXCursor C);
3481
3482/**
3483 * \brief Determine whether the given cursor represents an anonymous record
3484 * declaration.
3485 */
3486CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isAnonymous(CXCursor C);
3487
Argyrios Kyrtzidisadff3ae2013-10-11 19:58:38 +00003488enum CXRefQualifierKind {
3489 /** \brief No ref-qualifier was provided. */
3490 CXRefQualifier_None = 0,
3491 /** \brief An lvalue ref-qualifier was provided (\c &). */
3492 CXRefQualifier_LValue,
3493 /** \brief An rvalue ref-qualifier was provided (\c &&). */
3494 CXRefQualifier_RValue
3495};
3496
3497/**
Dmitri Gribenko6ede6ab2014-02-27 16:05:05 +00003498 * \brief Returns the number of template arguments for given class template
3499 * specialization, or -1 if type \c T is not a class template specialization.
3500 *
3501 * Variadic argument packs count as only one argument, and can not be inspected
3502 * further.
3503 */
3504CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Type_getNumTemplateArguments(CXType T);
3505
3506/**
3507 * \brief Returns the type template argument of a template class specialization
3508 * at given index.
3509 *
3510 * This function only returns template type arguments and does not handle
3511 * template template arguments or variadic packs.
3512 */
3513CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getTemplateArgumentAsType(CXType T, unsigned i);
3514
3515/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisadff3ae2013-10-11 19:58:38 +00003516 * \brief Retrieve the ref-qualifier kind of a function or method.
3517 *
3518 * The ref-qualifier is returned for C++ functions or methods. For other types
3519 * or non-C++ declarations, CXRefQualifier_None is returned.
3520 */
3521CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXRefQualifierKind clang_Type_getCXXRefQualifier(CXType T);
3522
Argyrios Kyrtzidise822f582013-04-11 01:20:11 +00003523/**
3524 * \brief Returns non-zero if the cursor specifies a Record member that is a
3525 * bitfield.
3526 */
3527CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isBitField(CXCursor C);
3528
3529/**
Ted Kremenekae9e2212010-08-27 21:34:58 +00003530 * \brief Returns 1 if the base class specified by the cursor with kind
3531 * CX_CXXBaseSpecifier is virtual.
3532 */
3533CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isVirtualBase(CXCursor);
3534
3535/**
3536 * \brief Represents the C++ access control level to a base class for a
3537 * cursor with kind CX_CXXBaseSpecifier.
3538 */
3539enum CX_CXXAccessSpecifier {
3540 CX_CXXInvalidAccessSpecifier,
3541 CX_CXXPublic,
3542 CX_CXXProtected,
3543 CX_CXXPrivate
3544};
3545
3546/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis1ab09cc2013-04-11 17:02:10 +00003547 * \brief Returns the access control level for the referenced object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf6464082013-04-11 17:31:13 +00003548 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis1ab09cc2013-04-11 17:02:10 +00003549 * If the cursor refers to a C++ declaration, its access control level within its
3550 * parent scope is returned. Otherwise, if the cursor refers to a base specifier or
3551 * access specifier, the specifier itself is returned.
Ted Kremenekae9e2212010-08-27 21:34:58 +00003552 */
3553CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CX_CXXAccessSpecifier clang_getCXXAccessSpecifier(CXCursor);
3554
3555/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4e0854f2014-10-15 17:05:31 +00003556 * \brief Represents the storage classes as declared in the source. CX_SC_Invalid
Chad Rosierdb1cc7f2014-12-05 15:50:44 +00003557 * was added for the case that the passed cursor in not a declaration.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4e0854f2014-10-15 17:05:31 +00003558 */
3559enum CX_StorageClass {
3560 CX_SC_Invalid,
3561 CX_SC_None,
3562 CX_SC_Extern,
3563 CX_SC_Static,
3564 CX_SC_PrivateExtern,
3565 CX_SC_OpenCLWorkGroupLocal,
3566 CX_SC_Auto,
3567 CX_SC_Register
3568};
3569
3570/**
3571 * \brief Returns the storage class for a function or variable declaration.
3572 *
3573 * If the passed in Cursor is not a function or variable declaration,
3574 * CX_SC_Invalid is returned else the storage class.
3575 */
3576CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CX_StorageClass clang_Cursor_getStorageClass(CXCursor);
3577
3578/**
Douglas Gregor16a2bdd2010-09-13 22:52:57 +00003579 * \brief Determine the number of overloaded declarations referenced by a
3580 * \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor.
3581 *
3582 * \param cursor The cursor whose overloaded declarations are being queried.
3583 *
3584 * \returns The number of overloaded declarations referenced by \c cursor. If it
3585 * is not a \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor, returns 0.
3586 */
3587CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumOverloadedDecls(CXCursor cursor);
3588
3589/**
3590 * \brief Retrieve a cursor for one of the overloaded declarations referenced
3591 * by a \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor.
3592 *
3593 * \param cursor The cursor whose overloaded declarations are being queried.
3594 *
3595 * \param index The zero-based index into the set of overloaded declarations in
3596 * the cursor.
3597 *
3598 * \returns A cursor representing the declaration referenced by the given
3599 * \c cursor at the specified \c index. If the cursor does not have an
3600 * associated set of overloaded declarations, or if the index is out of bounds,
3601 * returns \c clang_getNullCursor();
3602 */
3603CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getOverloadedDecl(CXCursor cursor,
3604 unsigned index);
3605
3606/**
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003607 * @}
3608 */
Ted Kremeneka5940822010-08-26 01:42:22 +00003609
3610/**
Ted Kremenek2c2c5f32010-08-27 21:34:51 +00003611 * \defgroup CINDEX_ATTRIBUTES Information for attributes
Ted Kremeneka5940822010-08-26 01:42:22 +00003612 *
3613 * @{
3614 */
3615
Ted Kremeneka5940822010-08-26 01:42:22 +00003616/**
3617 * \brief For cursors representing an iboutletcollection attribute,
3618 * this function returns the collection element type.
3619 *
3620 */
3621CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getIBOutletCollectionType(CXCursor);
3622
3623/**
3624 * @}
3625 */
Ted Kremenek6bca9842010-05-14 21:29:26 +00003626
3627/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003628 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_TRAVERSAL Traversing the AST with cursors
3629 *
3630 * These routines provide the ability to traverse the abstract syntax tree
3631 * using cursors.
3632 *
3633 * @{
3634 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003635
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003636/**
3637 * \brief Describes how the traversal of the children of a particular
3638 * cursor should proceed after visiting a particular child cursor.
3639 *
3640 * A value of this enumeration type should be returned by each
3641 * \c CXCursorVisitor to indicate how clang_visitChildren() proceed.
3642 */
3643enum CXChildVisitResult {
3644 /**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003645 * \brief Terminates the cursor traversal.
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003646 */
3647 CXChildVisit_Break,
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003648 /**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003649 * \brief Continues the cursor traversal with the next sibling of
3650 * the cursor just visited, without visiting its children.
3651 */
3652 CXChildVisit_Continue,
3653 /**
3654 * \brief Recursively traverse the children of this cursor, using
3655 * the same visitor and client data.
3656 */
3657 CXChildVisit_Recurse
3658};
3659
3660/**
3661 * \brief Visitor invoked for each cursor found by a traversal.
3662 *
3663 * This visitor function will be invoked for each cursor found by
3664 * clang_visitCursorChildren(). Its first argument is the cursor being
3665 * visited, its second argument is the parent visitor for that cursor,
3666 * and its third argument is the client data provided to
3667 * clang_visitCursorChildren().
3668 *
3669 * The visitor should return one of the \c CXChildVisitResult values
3670 * to direct clang_visitCursorChildren().
3671 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003672typedef enum CXChildVisitResult (*CXCursorVisitor)(CXCursor cursor,
3673 CXCursor parent,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003674 CXClientData client_data);
3675
3676/**
3677 * \brief Visit the children of a particular cursor.
3678 *
3679 * This function visits all the direct children of the given cursor,
3680 * invoking the given \p visitor function with the cursors of each
3681 * visited child. The traversal may be recursive, if the visitor returns
3682 * \c CXChildVisit_Recurse. The traversal may also be ended prematurely, if
3683 * the visitor returns \c CXChildVisit_Break.
3684 *
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003685 * \param parent the cursor whose child may be visited. All kinds of
Daniel Dunbarb9999fd2010-01-24 04:10:31 +00003686 * cursors can be visited, including invalid cursors (which, by
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003687 * definition, have no children).
3688 *
3689 * \param visitor the visitor function that will be invoked for each
3690 * child of \p parent.
3691 *
3692 * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will
3693 * be passed to the visitor each time it is invoked.
3694 *
3695 * \returns a non-zero value if the traversal was terminated
3696 * prematurely by the visitor returning \c CXChildVisit_Break.
3697 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003698CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_visitChildren(CXCursor parent,
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003699 CXCursorVisitor visitor,
3700 CXClientData client_data);
David Chisnallb2aa0ef2010-11-03 14:12:26 +00003701#ifdef __has_feature
3702# if __has_feature(blocks)
3703/**
3704 * \brief Visitor invoked for each cursor found by a traversal.
3705 *
3706 * This visitor block will be invoked for each cursor found by
3707 * clang_visitChildrenWithBlock(). Its first argument is the cursor being
3708 * visited, its second argument is the parent visitor for that cursor.
3709 *
3710 * The visitor should return one of the \c CXChildVisitResult values
3711 * to direct clang_visitChildrenWithBlock().
3712 */
3713typedef enum CXChildVisitResult
3714 (^CXCursorVisitorBlock)(CXCursor cursor, CXCursor parent);
3715
3716/**
3717 * Visits the children of a cursor using the specified block. Behaves
3718 * identically to clang_visitChildren() in all other respects.
3719 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisa0a35d72016-02-07 18:21:28 +00003720CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_visitChildrenWithBlock(CXCursor parent,
3721 CXCursorVisitorBlock block);
David Chisnallb2aa0ef2010-11-03 14:12:26 +00003722# endif
3723#endif
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003724
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003725/**
3726 * @}
3727 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003728
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003729/**
3730 * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_XREF Cross-referencing in the AST
3731 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003732 * These routines provide the ability to determine references within and
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003733 * across translation units, by providing the names of the entities referenced
3734 * by cursors, follow reference cursors to the declarations they reference,
3735 * and associate declarations with their definitions.
3736 *
3737 * @{
3738 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003739
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003740/**
3741 * \brief Retrieve a Unified Symbol Resolution (USR) for the entity referenced
3742 * by the given cursor.
3743 *
3744 * A Unified Symbol Resolution (USR) is a string that identifies a particular
3745 * entity (function, class, variable, etc.) within a program. USRs can be
3746 * compared across translation units to determine, e.g., when references in
3747 * one translation refer to an entity defined in another translation unit.
3748 */
3749CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorUSR(CXCursor);
3750
3751/**
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00003752 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C class.
3753 */
3754CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCClass(const char *class_name);
3755
3756/**
3757 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C category.
3758 */
3759CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
Ted Kremenekbc1a67b2010-03-15 17:38:58 +00003760 clang_constructUSR_ObjCCategory(const char *class_name,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00003761 const char *category_name);
3762
3763/**
3764 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C protocol.
3765 */
3766CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
3767 clang_constructUSR_ObjCProtocol(const char *protocol_name);
3768
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00003769/**
3770 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C instance variable and
3771 * the USR for its containing class.
3772 */
3773CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCIvar(const char *name,
3774 CXString classUSR);
3775
3776/**
3777 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C method and
3778 * the USR for its containing class.
3779 */
3780CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCMethod(const char *name,
3781 unsigned isInstanceMethod,
3782 CXString classUSR);
3783
3784/**
3785 * \brief Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C property and the USR
3786 * for its containing class.
3787 */
3788CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCProperty(const char *property,
3789 CXString classUSR);
3790
3791/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003792 * \brief Retrieve a name for the entity referenced by this cursor.
3793 */
3794CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorSpelling(CXCursor);
3795
Douglas Gregor97c75712010-10-02 22:49:11 +00003796/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis191a6a82012-03-30 20:58:35 +00003797 * \brief Retrieve a range for a piece that forms the cursors spelling name.
3798 * Most of the times there is only one range for the complete spelling but for
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003799 * Objective-C methods and Objective-C message expressions, there are multiple
3800 * pieces for each selector identifier.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis191a6a82012-03-30 20:58:35 +00003801 *
3802 * \param pieceIndex the index of the spelling name piece. If this is greater
3803 * than the actual number of pieces, it will return a NULL (invalid) range.
3804 *
3805 * \param options Reserved.
3806 */
3807CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_Cursor_getSpellingNameRange(CXCursor,
3808 unsigned pieceIndex,
3809 unsigned options);
3810
3811/**
Douglas Gregor97c75712010-10-02 22:49:11 +00003812 * \brief Retrieve the display name for the entity referenced by this cursor.
3813 *
3814 * The display name contains extra information that helps identify the cursor,
3815 * such as the parameters of a function or template or the arguments of a
3816 * class template specialization.
3817 */
3818CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorDisplayName(CXCursor);
3819
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00003820/** \brief For a cursor that is a reference, retrieve a cursor representing the
3821 * entity that it references.
3822 *
3823 * Reference cursors refer to other entities in the AST. For example, an
3824 * Objective-C superclass reference cursor refers to an Objective-C class.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003825 * This function produces the cursor for the Objective-C class from the
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00003826 * cursor for the superclass reference. If the input cursor is a declaration or
3827 * definition, it returns that declaration or definition unchanged.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003828 * Otherwise, returns the NULL cursor.
Douglas Gregorad27e8b2010-01-19 01:20:04 +00003829 */
3830CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorReferenced(CXCursor);
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00003831
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003832/**
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00003833 * \brief For a cursor that is either a reference to or a declaration
3834 * of some entity, retrieve a cursor that describes the definition of
3835 * that entity.
3836 *
3837 * Some entities can be declared multiple times within a translation
3838 * unit, but only one of those declarations can also be a
3839 * definition. For example, given:
3840 *
3841 * \code
3842 * int f(int, int);
3843 * int g(int x, int y) { return f(x, y); }
3844 * int f(int a, int b) { return a + b; }
3845 * int f(int, int);
3846 * \endcode
3847 *
3848 * there are three declarations of the function "f", but only the
3849 * second one is a definition. The clang_getCursorDefinition()
3850 * function will take any cursor pointing to a declaration of "f"
3851 * (the first or fourth lines of the example) or a cursor referenced
3852 * that uses "f" (the call to "f' inside "g") and will return a
3853 * declaration cursor pointing to the definition (the second "f"
3854 * declaration).
3855 *
3856 * If given a cursor for which there is no corresponding definition,
3857 * e.g., because there is no definition of that entity within this
3858 * translation unit, returns a NULL cursor.
3859 */
3860CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorDefinition(CXCursor);
3861
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00003862/**
Douglas Gregor6b8232f2010-01-19 19:34:47 +00003863 * \brief Determine whether the declaration pointed to by this cursor
3864 * is also a definition of that entity.
3865 */
3866CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isCursorDefinition(CXCursor);
3867
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00003868/**
Douglas Gregorfec4dc92010-11-19 23:44:15 +00003869 * \brief Retrieve the canonical cursor corresponding to the given cursor.
3870 *
3871 * In the C family of languages, many kinds of entities can be declared several
3872 * times within a single translation unit. For example, a structure type can
3873 * be forward-declared (possibly multiple times) and later defined:
3874 *
3875 * \code
3876 * struct X;
3877 * struct X;
3878 * struct X {
3879 * int member;
3880 * };
3881 * \endcode
3882 *
3883 * The declarations and the definition of \c X are represented by three
3884 * different cursors, all of which are declarations of the same underlying
3885 * entity. One of these cursor is considered the "canonical" cursor, which
3886 * is effectively the representative for the underlying entity. One can
3887 * determine if two cursors are declarations of the same underlying entity by
3888 * comparing their canonical cursors.
3889 *
3890 * \returns The canonical cursor for the entity referred to by the given cursor.
3891 */
3892CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCanonicalCursor(CXCursor);
3893
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00003894/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003895 * \brief If the cursor points to a selector identifier in an Objective-C
3896 * method or message expression, this returns the selector index.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00003897 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00003898 * After getting a cursor with #clang_getCursor, this can be called to
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00003899 * determine if the location points to a selector identifier.
3900 *
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003901 * \returns The selector index if the cursor is an Objective-C method or message
Argyrios Kyrtzidis210f29f2012-03-30 22:15:48 +00003902 * expression and the cursor is pointing to a selector identifier, or -1
3903 * otherwise.
3904 */
3905CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getObjCSelectorIndex(CXCursor);
3906
Douglas Gregorfec4dc92010-11-19 23:44:15 +00003907/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003908 * \brief Given a cursor pointing to a C++ method call or an Objective-C
3909 * message, returns non-zero if the method/message is "dynamic", meaning:
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb6df68212012-07-02 23:54:36 +00003910 *
3911 * For a C++ method: the call is virtual.
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003912 * For an Objective-C message: the receiver is an object instance, not 'super'
3913 * or a specific class.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb6df68212012-07-02 23:54:36 +00003914 *
3915 * If the method/message is "static" or the cursor does not point to a
3916 * method/message, it will return zero.
3917 */
3918CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_isDynamicCall(CXCursor C);
3919
3920/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003921 * \brief Given a cursor pointing to an Objective-C message, returns the CXType
3922 * of the receiver.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisb26a24c2012-11-01 02:01:34 +00003923 */
3924CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Cursor_getReceiverType(CXCursor C);
3925
3926/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9adfd8a2013-04-18 22:15:49 +00003927 * \brief Property attributes for a \c CXCursor_ObjCPropertyDecl.
3928 */
3929typedef enum {
3930 CXObjCPropertyAttr_noattr = 0x00,
3931 CXObjCPropertyAttr_readonly = 0x01,
3932 CXObjCPropertyAttr_getter = 0x02,
3933 CXObjCPropertyAttr_assign = 0x04,
3934 CXObjCPropertyAttr_readwrite = 0x08,
3935 CXObjCPropertyAttr_retain = 0x10,
3936 CXObjCPropertyAttr_copy = 0x20,
3937 CXObjCPropertyAttr_nonatomic = 0x40,
3938 CXObjCPropertyAttr_setter = 0x80,
3939 CXObjCPropertyAttr_atomic = 0x100,
3940 CXObjCPropertyAttr_weak = 0x200,
3941 CXObjCPropertyAttr_strong = 0x400,
Manman Ren04fd4d82016-05-31 23:22:04 +00003942 CXObjCPropertyAttr_unsafe_unretained = 0x800,
Manman Ren400e4c32016-06-03 23:11:41 +00003943 CXObjCPropertyAttr_class = 0x1000
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9adfd8a2013-04-18 22:15:49 +00003944} CXObjCPropertyAttrKind;
3945
3946/**
3947 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a property declaration, return the
3948 * associated property attributes. The bits are formed from
3949 * \c CXObjCPropertyAttrKind.
3950 *
3951 * \param reserved Reserved for future use, pass 0.
3952 */
3953CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_getObjCPropertyAttributes(CXCursor C,
3954 unsigned reserved);
3955
3956/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9d9bc012013-04-18 23:29:12 +00003957 * \brief 'Qualifiers' written next to the return and parameter types in
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003958 * Objective-C method declarations.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9d9bc012013-04-18 23:29:12 +00003959 */
3960typedef enum {
3961 CXObjCDeclQualifier_None = 0x0,
3962 CXObjCDeclQualifier_In = 0x1,
3963 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Inout = 0x2,
3964 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Out = 0x4,
3965 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Bycopy = 0x8,
3966 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Byref = 0x10,
3967 CXObjCDeclQualifier_Oneway = 0x20
3968} CXObjCDeclQualifierKind;
3969
3970/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003971 * \brief Given a cursor that represents an Objective-C method or parameter
3972 * declaration, return the associated Objective-C qualifiers for the return
3973 * type or the parameter respectively. The bits are formed from
3974 * CXObjCDeclQualifierKind.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9d9bc012013-04-18 23:29:12 +00003975 */
3976CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_getObjCDeclQualifiers(CXCursor C);
3977
3978/**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00003979 * \brief Given a cursor that represents an Objective-C method or property
3980 * declaration, return non-zero if the declaration was affected by "@optional".
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7b50fc52013-07-05 20:44:37 +00003981 * Returns zero if the cursor is not such a declaration or it is "@required".
3982 */
3983CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isObjCOptional(CXCursor C);
3984
3985/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis23814e42013-04-18 23:53:05 +00003986 * \brief Returns non-zero if the given cursor is a variadic function or method.
3987 */
3988CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isVariadic(CXCursor C);
3989
3990/**
Dmitri Gribenkoaab83832012-06-20 00:34:58 +00003991 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a declaration, return the associated
3992 * comment's source range. The range may include multiple consecutive comments
3993 * with whitespace in between.
3994 */
3995CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_Cursor_getCommentRange(CXCursor C);
3996
3997/**
3998 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a declaration, return the associated
3999 * comment text, including comment markers.
4000 */
4001CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getRawCommentText(CXCursor C);
4002
4003/**
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00004004 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a documentable entity (e.g.,
4005 * declaration), return the associated \\brief paragraph; otherwise return the
4006 * first paragraph.
Dmitri Gribenko5188c4b2012-06-26 20:39:18 +00004007 */
4008CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getBriefCommentText(CXCursor C);
4009
4010/**
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00004011 * @}
4012 */
4013
Eli Bendersky44a206f2014-07-31 18:04:56 +00004014/** \defgroup CINDEX_MANGLE Name Mangling API Functions
4015 *
4016 * @{
4017 */
4018
4019/**
4020 * \brief Retrieve the CXString representing the mangled name of the cursor.
4021 */
4022CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getMangling(CXCursor);
4023
4024/**
Saleem Abdulrasool60034432015-11-12 03:57:22 +00004025 * \brief Retrieve the CXStrings representing the mangled symbols of the C++
4026 * constructor or destructor at the cursor.
4027 */
4028CINDEX_LINKAGE CXStringSet *clang_Cursor_getCXXManglings(CXCursor);
4029
4030/**
Eli Bendersky44a206f2014-07-31 18:04:56 +00004031 * @}
4032 */
4033
Dmitri Gribenko5e4fe002012-07-20 21:34:34 +00004034/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004035 * \defgroup CINDEX_MODULE Module introspection
4036 *
4037 * The functions in this group provide access to information about modules.
4038 *
4039 * @{
4040 */
4041
4042typedef void *CXModule;
4043
4044/**
4045 * \brief Given a CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl cursor, return the associated module.
4046 */
4047CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_Cursor_getModule(CXCursor C);
4048
4049/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf6d49c32014-05-14 23:14:37 +00004050 * \brief Given a CXFile header file, return the module that contains it, if one
4051 * exists.
4052 */
4053CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_getModuleForFile(CXTranslationUnit, CXFile);
4054
4055/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004056 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004057 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis12fdb9e2013-04-26 22:47:49 +00004058 * \returns the module file where the provided module object came from.
4059 */
4060CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_Module_getASTFile(CXModule Module);
4061
4062/**
4063 * \param Module a module object.
4064 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004065 * \returns the parent of a sub-module or NULL if the given module is top-level,
4066 * e.g. for 'std.vector' it will return the 'std' module.
4067 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004068CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_Module_getParent(CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004069
4070/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004071 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004072 *
4073 * \returns the name of the module, e.g. for the 'std.vector' sub-module it
4074 * will return "vector".
4075 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004076CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Module_getName(CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004077
4078/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004079 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004080 *
4081 * \returns the full name of the module, e.g. "std.vector".
4082 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004083CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Module_getFullName(CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004084
4085/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004086 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004087 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis884337f2014-05-15 04:44:25 +00004088 * \returns non-zero if the module is a system one.
4089 */
4090CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Module_isSystem(CXModule Module);
4091
4092/**
4093 * \param Module a module object.
4094 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004095 * \returns the number of top level headers associated with this module.
4096 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3c5305c2013-03-13 21:13:43 +00004097CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Module_getNumTopLevelHeaders(CXTranslationUnit,
4098 CXModule Module);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004099
4100/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004101 * \param Module a module object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004102 *
4103 * \param Index top level header index (zero-based).
4104 *
4105 * \returns the specified top level header associated with the module.
4106 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisba30d922012-10-06 01:18:38 +00004107CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3c5305c2013-03-13 21:13:43 +00004108CXFile clang_Module_getTopLevelHeader(CXTranslationUnit,
4109 CXModule Module, unsigned Index);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2b9b5bb2012-10-05 00:22:37 +00004110
4111/**
4112 * @}
4113 */
4114
4115/**
Ted Kremenek9cfe9e62010-05-17 20:06:56 +00004116 * \defgroup CINDEX_CPP C++ AST introspection
4117 *
4118 * The routines in this group provide access information in the ASTs specific
4119 * to C++ language features.
4120 *
4121 * @{
4122 */
4123
4124/**
Jonathan Coe29565352016-04-27 12:48:25 +00004125 * \brief Determine if a C++ constructor is a converting constructor.
4126 */
4127CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXConstructor_isConvertingConstructor(CXCursor C);
4128
4129/**
4130 * \brief Determine if a C++ constructor is a copy constructor.
4131 */
4132CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXConstructor_isCopyConstructor(CXCursor C);
4133
4134/**
4135 * \brief Determine if a C++ constructor is the default constructor.
4136 */
4137CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXConstructor_isDefaultConstructor(CXCursor C);
4138
4139/**
4140 * \brief Determine if a C++ constructor is a move constructor.
4141 */
4142CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXConstructor_isMoveConstructor(CXCursor C);
4143
4144/**
Saleem Abdulrasool6ea75db2015-10-27 15:50:22 +00004145 * \brief Determine if a C++ field is declared 'mutable'.
4146 */
4147CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXField_isMutable(CXCursor C);
4148
4149/**
Jonathan Coe29565352016-04-27 12:48:25 +00004150 * \brief Determine if a C++ method is declared '= default'.
4151 */
4152CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isDefaulted(CXCursor C);
4153
4154/**
Dmitri Gribenko62770be2013-05-17 18:38:35 +00004155 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
4156 * pure virtual.
4157 */
4158CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isPureVirtual(CXCursor C);
4159
4160/**
Douglas Gregorf11309e2010-08-31 22:12:17 +00004161 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
4162 * declared 'static'.
Ted Kremenek9cfe9e62010-05-17 20:06:56 +00004163 */
4164CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isStatic(CXCursor C);
4165
4166/**
Douglas Gregor9519d922011-05-12 15:17:24 +00004167 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
4168 * explicitly declared 'virtual' or if it overrides a virtual method from
4169 * one of the base classes.
4170 */
4171CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isVirtual(CXCursor C);
4172
4173/**
Dmitri Gribenkoe570ede2014-04-07 14:59:13 +00004174 * \brief Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is
4175 * declared 'const'.
4176 */
4177CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isConst(CXCursor C);
4178
4179/**
Douglas Gregorf11309e2010-08-31 22:12:17 +00004180 * \brief Given a cursor that represents a template, determine
4181 * the cursor kind of the specializations would be generated by instantiating
4182 * the template.
4183 *
4184 * This routine can be used to determine what flavor of function template,
4185 * class template, or class template partial specialization is stored in the
4186 * cursor. For example, it can describe whether a class template cursor is
4187 * declared with "struct", "class" or "union".
4188 *
4189 * \param C The cursor to query. This cursor should represent a template
4190 * declaration.
4191 *
4192 * \returns The cursor kind of the specializations that would be generated
4193 * by instantiating the template \p C. If \p C is not a template, returns
4194 * \c CXCursor_NoDeclFound.
4195 */
4196CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCursorKind clang_getTemplateCursorKind(CXCursor C);
4197
4198/**
Douglas Gregord3f48bd2010-09-02 00:07:54 +00004199 * \brief Given a cursor that may represent a specialization or instantiation
4200 * of a template, retrieve the cursor that represents the template that it
4201 * specializes or from which it was instantiated.
4202 *
4203 * This routine determines the template involved both for explicit
4204 * specializations of templates and for implicit instantiations of the template,
4205 * both of which are referred to as "specializations". For a class template
4206 * specialization (e.g., \c std::vector<bool>), this routine will return
4207 * either the primary template (\c std::vector) or, if the specialization was
4208 * instantiated from a class template partial specialization, the class template
4209 * partial specialization. For a class template partial specialization and a
4210 * function template specialization (including instantiations), this
4211 * this routine will return the specialized template.
4212 *
4213 * For members of a class template (e.g., member functions, member classes, or
4214 * static data members), returns the specialized or instantiated member.
4215 * Although not strictly "templates" in the C++ language, members of class
4216 * templates have the same notions of specializations and instantiations that
4217 * templates do, so this routine treats them similarly.
4218 *
4219 * \param C A cursor that may be a specialization of a template or a member
4220 * of a template.
4221 *
4222 * \returns If the given cursor is a specialization or instantiation of a
4223 * template or a member thereof, the template or member that it specializes or
4224 * from which it was instantiated. Otherwise, returns a NULL cursor.
4225 */
4226CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getSpecializedCursorTemplate(CXCursor C);
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004227
4228/**
4229 * \brief Given a cursor that references something else, return the source range
4230 * covering that reference.
4231 *
4232 * \param C A cursor pointing to a member reference, a declaration reference, or
4233 * an operator call.
4234 * \param NameFlags A bitset with three independent flags:
4235 * CXNameRange_WantQualifier, CXNameRange_WantTemplateArgs, and
4236 * CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece.
4237 * \param PieceIndex For contiguous names or when passing the flag
4238 * CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece, only one piece with index 0 is
4239 * available. When the CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece flag is not passed for a
Benjamin Kramer474261a2012-06-02 10:20:41 +00004240 * non-contiguous names, this index can be used to retrieve the individual
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004241 * pieces of the name. See also CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece.
4242 *
4243 * \returns The piece of the name pointed to by the given cursor. If there is no
4244 * name, or if the PieceIndex is out-of-range, a null-cursor will be returned.
4245 */
Francois Pichetece689f2011-07-25 22:00:44 +00004246CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getCursorReferenceNameRange(CXCursor C,
4247 unsigned NameFlags,
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004248 unsigned PieceIndex);
4249
4250enum CXNameRefFlags {
4251 /**
4252 * \brief Include the nested-name-specifier, e.g. Foo:: in x.Foo::y, in the
4253 * range.
4254 */
4255 CXNameRange_WantQualifier = 0x1,
4256
4257 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00004258 * \brief Include the explicit template arguments, e.g. \<int> in x.f<int>,
4259 * in the range.
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004260 */
4261 CXNameRange_WantTemplateArgs = 0x2,
4262
4263 /**
4264 * \brief If the name is non-contiguous, return the full spanning range.
4265 *
4266 * Non-contiguous names occur in Objective-C when a selector with two or more
4267 * parameters is used, or in C++ when using an operator:
4268 * \code
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00004269 * [object doSomething:here withValue:there]; // Objective-C
Douglas Gregorc1679ec2011-07-25 17:48:11 +00004270 * return some_vector[1]; // C++
4271 * \endcode
4272 */
4273 CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece = 0x4
4274};
Douglas Gregord3f48bd2010-09-02 00:07:54 +00004275
4276/**
Ted Kremenek9cfe9e62010-05-17 20:06:56 +00004277 * @}
4278 */
4279
4280/**
Douglas Gregor61656112010-01-26 18:31:56 +00004281 * \defgroup CINDEX_LEX Token extraction and manipulation
4282 *
4283 * The routines in this group provide access to the tokens within a
4284 * translation unit, along with a semantic mapping of those tokens to
4285 * their corresponding cursors.
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004286 *
4287 * @{
4288 */
4289
4290/**
4291 * \brief Describes a kind of token.
4292 */
4293typedef enum CXTokenKind {
4294 /**
4295 * \brief A token that contains some kind of punctuation.
4296 */
4297 CXToken_Punctuation,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004298
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004299 /**
Douglas Gregor61656112010-01-26 18:31:56 +00004300 * \brief A language keyword.
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004301 */
4302 CXToken_Keyword,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004303
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004304 /**
4305 * \brief An identifier (that is not a keyword).
4306 */
4307 CXToken_Identifier,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004308
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004309 /**
4310 * \brief A numeric, string, or character literal.
4311 */
4312 CXToken_Literal,
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004313
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004314 /**
4315 * \brief A comment.
4316 */
4317 CXToken_Comment
4318} CXTokenKind;
4319
4320/**
4321 * \brief Describes a single preprocessing token.
4322 */
4323typedef struct {
4324 unsigned int_data[4];
4325 void *ptr_data;
4326} CXToken;
4327
4328/**
4329 * \brief Determine the kind of the given token.
4330 */
4331CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTokenKind clang_getTokenKind(CXToken);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004332
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004333/**
4334 * \brief Determine the spelling of the given token.
4335 *
4336 * The spelling of a token is the textual representation of that token, e.g.,
4337 * the text of an identifier or keyword.
4338 */
4339CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTokenSpelling(CXTranslationUnit, CXToken);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004340
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004341/**
4342 * \brief Retrieve the source location of the given token.
4343 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004344CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getTokenLocation(CXTranslationUnit,
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004345 CXToken);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004346
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004347/**
4348 * \brief Retrieve a source range that covers the given token.
4349 */
4350CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getTokenExtent(CXTranslationUnit, CXToken);
4351
4352/**
4353 * \brief Tokenize the source code described by the given range into raw
4354 * lexical tokens.
4355 *
4356 * \param TU the translation unit whose text is being tokenized.
4357 *
4358 * \param Range the source range in which text should be tokenized. All of the
4359 * tokens produced by tokenization will fall within this source range,
4360 *
4361 * \param Tokens this pointer will be set to point to the array of tokens
4362 * that occur within the given source range. The returned pointer must be
4363 * freed with clang_disposeTokens() before the translation unit is destroyed.
4364 *
4365 * \param NumTokens will be set to the number of tokens in the \c *Tokens
4366 * array.
4367 *
4368 */
4369CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_tokenize(CXTranslationUnit TU, CXSourceRange Range,
4370 CXToken **Tokens, unsigned *NumTokens);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004371
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004372/**
4373 * \brief Annotate the given set of tokens by providing cursors for each token
4374 * that can be mapped to a specific entity within the abstract syntax tree.
4375 *
Douglas Gregor61656112010-01-26 18:31:56 +00004376 * This token-annotation routine is equivalent to invoking
4377 * clang_getCursor() for the source locations of each of the
4378 * tokens. The cursors provided are filtered, so that only those
4379 * cursors that have a direct correspondence to the token are
4380 * accepted. For example, given a function call \c f(x),
4381 * clang_getCursor() would provide the following cursors:
4382 *
4383 * * when the cursor is over the 'f', a DeclRefExpr cursor referring to 'f'.
4384 * * when the cursor is over the '(' or the ')', a CallExpr referring to 'f'.
4385 * * when the cursor is over the 'x', a DeclRefExpr cursor referring to 'x'.
4386 *
4387 * Only the first and last of these cursors will occur within the
4388 * annotate, since the tokens "f" and "x' directly refer to a function
4389 * and a variable, respectively, but the parentheses are just a small
4390 * part of the full syntax of the function call expression, which is
4391 * not provided as an annotation.
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004392 *
4393 * \param TU the translation unit that owns the given tokens.
4394 *
4395 * \param Tokens the set of tokens to annotate.
4396 *
4397 * \param NumTokens the number of tokens in \p Tokens.
4398 *
4399 * \param Cursors an array of \p NumTokens cursors, whose contents will be
4400 * replaced with the cursors corresponding to each token.
4401 */
4402CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_annotateTokens(CXTranslationUnit TU,
4403 CXToken *Tokens, unsigned NumTokens,
4404 CXCursor *Cursors);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004405
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004406/**
4407 * \brief Free the given set of tokens.
4408 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004409CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeTokens(CXTranslationUnit TU,
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004410 CXToken *Tokens, unsigned NumTokens);
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004411
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004412/**
4413 * @}
4414 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00004415
Douglas Gregor27b4fa92010-01-26 17:06:03 +00004416/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004417 * \defgroup CINDEX_DEBUG Debugging facilities
4418 *
4419 * These routines are used for testing and debugging, only, and should not
4420 * be relied upon.
4421 *
4422 * @{
4423 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004424
Steve Naroff76b8f132009-09-23 17:52:52 +00004425/* for debug/testing */
Ted Kremenek29004672010-02-17 00:41:32 +00004426CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorKindSpelling(enum CXCursorKind Kind);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004427CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getDefinitionSpellingAndExtent(CXCursor,
4428 const char **startBuf,
Steve Naroff76b8f132009-09-23 17:52:52 +00004429 const char **endBuf,
4430 unsigned *startLine,
4431 unsigned *startColumn,
4432 unsigned *endLine,
4433 unsigned *endColumn);
Douglas Gregor1e21cc72010-02-18 23:07:20 +00004434CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_enableStackTraces(void);
Daniel Dunbar23420652010-11-04 01:26:29 +00004435CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_executeOnThread(void (*fn)(void*), void *user_data,
4436 unsigned stack_size);
4437
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004438/**
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004439 * @}
4440 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004441
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004442/**
4443 * \defgroup CINDEX_CODE_COMPLET Code completion
4444 *
4445 * Code completion involves taking an (incomplete) source file, along with
4446 * knowledge of where the user is actively editing that file, and suggesting
4447 * syntactically- and semantically-valid constructs that the user might want to
4448 * use at that particular point in the source code. These data structures and
4449 * routines provide support for code completion.
4450 *
4451 * @{
4452 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004453
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00004454/**
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004455 * \brief A semantic string that describes a code-completion result.
4456 *
4457 * A semantic string that describes the formatting of a code-completion
4458 * result as a single "template" of text that should be inserted into the
4459 * source buffer when a particular code-completion result is selected.
4460 * Each semantic string is made up of some number of "chunks", each of which
4461 * contains some text along with a description of what that text means, e.g.,
4462 * the name of the entity being referenced, whether the text chunk is part of
4463 * the template, or whether it is a "placeholder" that the user should replace
4464 * with actual code,of a specific kind. See \c CXCompletionChunkKind for a
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004465 * description of the different kinds of chunks.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004466 */
4467typedef void *CXCompletionString;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004468
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004469/**
4470 * \brief A single result of code completion.
4471 */
4472typedef struct {
4473 /**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004474 * \brief The kind of entity that this completion refers to.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004475 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004476 * The cursor kind will be a macro, keyword, or a declaration (one of the
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004477 * *Decl cursor kinds), describing the entity that the completion is
4478 * referring to.
4479 *
4480 * \todo In the future, we would like to provide a full cursor, to allow
4481 * the client to extract additional information from declaration.
4482 */
4483 enum CXCursorKind CursorKind;
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004484
4485 /**
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004486 * \brief The code-completion string that describes how to insert this
4487 * code-completion result into the editing buffer.
4488 */
4489 CXCompletionString CompletionString;
4490} CXCompletionResult;
4491
4492/**
4493 * \brief Describes a single piece of text within a code-completion string.
4494 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004495 * Each "chunk" within a code-completion string (\c CXCompletionString) is
4496 * either a piece of text with a specific "kind" that describes how that text
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004497 * should be interpreted by the client or is another completion string.
4498 */
4499enum CXCompletionChunkKind {
4500 /**
4501 * \brief A code-completion string that describes "optional" text that
4502 * could be a part of the template (but is not required).
4503 *
4504 * The Optional chunk is the only kind of chunk that has a code-completion
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004505 * string for its representation, which is accessible via
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004506 * \c clang_getCompletionChunkCompletionString(). The code-completion string
4507 * describes an additional part of the template that is completely optional.
4508 * For example, optional chunks can be used to describe the placeholders for
4509 * arguments that match up with defaulted function parameters, e.g. given:
4510 *
4511 * \code
4512 * void f(int x, float y = 3.14, double z = 2.71828);
4513 * \endcode
4514 *
4515 * The code-completion string for this function would contain:
4516 * - a TypedText chunk for "f".
4517 * - a LeftParen chunk for "(".
4518 * - a Placeholder chunk for "int x"
4519 * - an Optional chunk containing the remaining defaulted arguments, e.g.,
4520 * - a Comma chunk for ","
Daniel Dunbar4053fae2010-02-17 08:07:44 +00004521 * - a Placeholder chunk for "float y"
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004522 * - an Optional chunk containing the last defaulted argument:
4523 * - a Comma chunk for ","
4524 * - a Placeholder chunk for "double z"
4525 * - a RightParen chunk for ")"
4526 *
Daniel Dunbar4053fae2010-02-17 08:07:44 +00004527 * There are many ways to handle Optional chunks. Two simple approaches are:
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004528 * - Completely ignore optional chunks, in which case the template for the
4529 * function "f" would only include the first parameter ("int x").
4530 * - Fully expand all optional chunks, in which case the template for the
4531 * function "f" would have all of the parameters.
4532 */
4533 CXCompletionChunk_Optional,
4534 /**
4535 * \brief Text that a user would be expected to type to get this
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004536 * code-completion result.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004537 *
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004538 * There will be exactly one "typed text" chunk in a semantic string, which
4539 * will typically provide the spelling of a keyword or the name of a
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004540 * declaration that could be used at the current code point. Clients are
4541 * expected to filter the code-completion results based on the text in this
4542 * chunk.
4543 */
4544 CXCompletionChunk_TypedText,
4545 /**
4546 * \brief Text that should be inserted as part of a code-completion result.
4547 *
4548 * A "text" chunk represents text that is part of the template to be
4549 * inserted into user code should this particular code-completion result
4550 * be selected.
4551 */
4552 CXCompletionChunk_Text,
4553 /**
4554 * \brief Placeholder text that should be replaced by the user.
4555 *
4556 * A "placeholder" chunk marks a place where the user should insert text
4557 * into the code-completion template. For example, placeholders might mark
4558 * the function parameters for a function declaration, to indicate that the
4559 * user should provide arguments for each of those parameters. The actual
4560 * text in a placeholder is a suggestion for the text to display before
4561 * the user replaces the placeholder with real code.
4562 */
4563 CXCompletionChunk_Placeholder,
4564 /**
4565 * \brief Informative text that should be displayed but never inserted as
4566 * part of the template.
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004567 *
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004568 * An "informative" chunk contains annotations that can be displayed to
4569 * help the user decide whether a particular code-completion result is the
4570 * right option, but which is not part of the actual template to be inserted
4571 * by code completion.
4572 */
4573 CXCompletionChunk_Informative,
4574 /**
4575 * \brief Text that describes the current parameter when code-completion is
4576 * referring to function call, message send, or template specialization.
4577 *
4578 * A "current parameter" chunk occurs when code-completion is providing
4579 * information about a parameter corresponding to the argument at the
4580 * code-completion point. For example, given a function
4581 *
4582 * \code
4583 * int add(int x, int y);
4584 * \endcode
4585 *
4586 * and the source code \c add(, where the code-completion point is after the
4587 * "(", the code-completion string will contain a "current parameter" chunk
4588 * for "int x", indicating that the current argument will initialize that
4589 * parameter. After typing further, to \c add(17, (where the code-completion
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004590 * point is after the ","), the code-completion string will contain a
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004591 * "current paremeter" chunk to "int y".
4592 */
4593 CXCompletionChunk_CurrentParameter,
4594 /**
4595 * \brief A left parenthesis ('('), used to initiate a function call or
4596 * signal the beginning of a function parameter list.
4597 */
4598 CXCompletionChunk_LeftParen,
4599 /**
4600 * \brief A right parenthesis (')'), used to finish a function call or
4601 * signal the end of a function parameter list.
4602 */
4603 CXCompletionChunk_RightParen,
4604 /**
4605 * \brief A left bracket ('[').
4606 */
4607 CXCompletionChunk_LeftBracket,
4608 /**
4609 * \brief A right bracket (']').
4610 */
4611 CXCompletionChunk_RightBracket,
4612 /**
4613 * \brief A left brace ('{').
4614 */
4615 CXCompletionChunk_LeftBrace,
4616 /**
4617 * \brief A right brace ('}').
4618 */
4619 CXCompletionChunk_RightBrace,
4620 /**
4621 * \brief A left angle bracket ('<').
4622 */
4623 CXCompletionChunk_LeftAngle,
4624 /**
4625 * \brief A right angle bracket ('>').
4626 */
4627 CXCompletionChunk_RightAngle,
4628 /**
4629 * \brief A comma separator (',').
4630 */
Douglas Gregorb3fa9192009-12-18 18:53:37 +00004631 CXCompletionChunk_Comma,
4632 /**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004633 * \brief Text that specifies the result type of a given result.
Douglas Gregorb3fa9192009-12-18 18:53:37 +00004634 *
4635 * This special kind of informative chunk is not meant to be inserted into
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004636 * the text buffer. Rather, it is meant to illustrate the type that an
Douglas Gregorb3fa9192009-12-18 18:53:37 +00004637 * expression using the given completion string would have.
4638 */
Douglas Gregor504a6ae2010-01-10 23:08:15 +00004639 CXCompletionChunk_ResultType,
4640 /**
4641 * \brief A colon (':').
4642 */
4643 CXCompletionChunk_Colon,
4644 /**
4645 * \brief A semicolon (';').
4646 */
4647 CXCompletionChunk_SemiColon,
4648 /**
4649 * \brief An '=' sign.
4650 */
4651 CXCompletionChunk_Equal,
4652 /**
4653 * Horizontal space (' ').
4654 */
4655 CXCompletionChunk_HorizontalSpace,
4656 /**
4657 * Vertical space ('\n'), after which it is generally a good idea to
4658 * perform indentation.
4659 */
4660 CXCompletionChunk_VerticalSpace
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004661};
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004662
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004663/**
4664 * \brief Determine the kind of a particular chunk within a completion string.
4665 *
4666 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4667 *
4668 * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string.
4669 *
4670 * \returns the kind of the chunk at the index \c chunk_number.
4671 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004672CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCompletionChunkKind
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004673clang_getCompletionChunkKind(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4674 unsigned chunk_number);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004675
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004676/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004677 * \brief Retrieve the text associated with a particular chunk within a
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004678 * completion string.
4679 *
4680 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4681 *
4682 * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string.
4683 *
4684 * \returns the text associated with the chunk at index \c chunk_number.
4685 */
Ted Kremenekf602f962010-02-17 01:42:24 +00004686CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004687clang_getCompletionChunkText(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4688 unsigned chunk_number);
4689
4690/**
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004691 * \brief Retrieve the completion string associated with a particular chunk
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004692 * within a completion string.
4693 *
4694 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4695 *
4696 * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string.
4697 *
4698 * \returns the completion string associated with the chunk at index
Erik Verbruggen98ea7f62011-10-14 15:31:08 +00004699 * \c chunk_number.
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004700 */
4701CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCompletionString
4702clang_getCompletionChunkCompletionString(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4703 unsigned chunk_number);
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00004704
Douglas Gregor9eb77012009-11-07 00:00:49 +00004705/**
4706 * \brief Retrieve the number of chunks in the given code-completion string.
4707 */
4708CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
4709clang_getNumCompletionChunks(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4710
4711/**
Douglas Gregora2db7932010-05-26 22:00:08 +00004712 * \brief Determine the priority of this code completion.
4713 *
4714 * The priority of a code completion indicates how likely it is that this
4715 * particular completion is the completion that the user will select. The
4716 * priority is selected by various internal heuristics.
4717 *
4718 * \param completion_string The completion string to query.
4719 *
4720 * \returns The priority of this completion string. Smaller values indicate
4721 * higher-priority (more likely) completions.
4722 */
4723CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
4724clang_getCompletionPriority(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4725
4726/**
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +00004727 * \brief Determine the availability of the entity that this code-completion
4728 * string refers to.
4729 *
4730 * \param completion_string The completion string to query.
4731 *
4732 * \returns The availability of the completion string.
4733 */
4734CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXAvailabilityKind
4735clang_getCompletionAvailability(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4736
4737/**
Erik Verbruggen98ea7f62011-10-14 15:31:08 +00004738 * \brief Retrieve the number of annotations associated with the given
4739 * completion string.
4740 *
4741 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4742 *
4743 * \returns the number of annotations associated with the given completion
4744 * string.
4745 */
4746CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned
4747clang_getCompletionNumAnnotations(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4748
4749/**
4750 * \brief Retrieve the annotation associated with the given completion string.
4751 *
4752 * \param completion_string the completion string to query.
4753 *
4754 * \param annotation_number the 0-based index of the annotation of the
4755 * completion string.
4756 *
4757 * \returns annotation string associated with the completion at index
4758 * \c annotation_number, or a NULL string if that annotation is not available.
4759 */
4760CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
4761clang_getCompletionAnnotation(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4762 unsigned annotation_number);
4763
4764/**
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00004765 * \brief Retrieve the parent context of the given completion string.
4766 *
4767 * The parent context of a completion string is the semantic parent of
4768 * the declaration (if any) that the code completion represents. For example,
4769 * a code completion for an Objective-C method would have the method's class
4770 * or protocol as its context.
4771 *
4772 * \param completion_string The code completion string whose parent is
4773 * being queried.
4774 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9ae39562012-09-26 16:39:56 +00004775 * \param kind DEPRECATED: always set to CXCursor_NotImplemented if non-NULL.
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00004776 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00004777 * \returns The name of the completion parent, e.g., "NSObject" if
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00004778 * the completion string represents a method in the NSObject class.
4779 */
4780CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
4781clang_getCompletionParent(CXCompletionString completion_string,
4782 enum CXCursorKind *kind);
Dmitri Gribenko3292d062012-07-02 17:35:10 +00004783
4784/**
4785 * \brief Retrieve the brief documentation comment attached to the declaration
4786 * that corresponds to the given completion string.
4787 */
4788CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString
4789clang_getCompletionBriefComment(CXCompletionString completion_string);
4790
Douglas Gregor78254c82012-03-27 23:34:16 +00004791/**
Douglas Gregor3f35bb22011-08-04 20:04:59 +00004792 * \brief Retrieve a completion string for an arbitrary declaration or macro
4793 * definition cursor.
4794 *
4795 * \param cursor The cursor to query.
4796 *
4797 * \returns A non-context-sensitive completion string for declaration and macro
4798 * definition cursors, or NULL for other kinds of cursors.
4799 */
4800CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCompletionString
4801clang_getCursorCompletionString(CXCursor cursor);
4802
4803/**
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00004804 * \brief Contains the results of code-completion.
4805 *
4806 * This data structure contains the results of code completion, as
Douglas Gregor6a9580282010-10-11 21:51:20 +00004807 * produced by \c clang_codeCompleteAt(). Its contents must be freed by
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00004808 * \c clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults.
4809 */
4810typedef struct {
4811 /**
4812 * \brief The code-completion results.
4813 */
4814 CXCompletionResult *Results;
4815
4816 /**
4817 * \brief The number of code-completion results stored in the
4818 * \c Results array.
4819 */
4820 unsigned NumResults;
4821} CXCodeCompleteResults;
4822
4823/**
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00004824 * \brief Flags that can be passed to \c clang_codeCompleteAt() to
4825 * modify its behavior.
4826 *
4827 * The enumerators in this enumeration can be bitwise-OR'd together to
4828 * provide multiple options to \c clang_codeCompleteAt().
4829 */
4830enum CXCodeComplete_Flags {
4831 /**
4832 * \brief Whether to include macros within the set of code
4833 * completions returned.
4834 */
4835 CXCodeComplete_IncludeMacros = 0x01,
4836
4837 /**
4838 * \brief Whether to include code patterns for language constructs
4839 * within the set of code completions, e.g., for loops.
4840 */
Dmitri Gribenko3292d062012-07-02 17:35:10 +00004841 CXCodeComplete_IncludeCodePatterns = 0x02,
4842
4843 /**
4844 * \brief Whether to include brief documentation within the set of code
4845 * completions returned.
4846 */
4847 CXCodeComplete_IncludeBriefComments = 0x04
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00004848};
4849
4850/**
Douglas Gregor21325842011-07-07 16:03:39 +00004851 * \brief Bits that represent the context under which completion is occurring.
4852 *
4853 * The enumerators in this enumeration may be bitwise-OR'd together if multiple
4854 * contexts are occurring simultaneously.
4855 */
4856enum CXCompletionContext {
4857 /**
4858 * \brief The context for completions is unexposed, as only Clang results
4859 * should be included. (This is equivalent to having no context bits set.)
4860 */
4861 CXCompletionContext_Unexposed = 0,
4862
4863 /**
4864 * \brief Completions for any possible type should be included in the results.
4865 */
4866 CXCompletionContext_AnyType = 1 << 0,
4867
4868 /**
4869 * \brief Completions for any possible value (variables, function calls, etc.)
4870 * should be included in the results.
4871 */
4872 CXCompletionContext_AnyValue = 1 << 1,
4873 /**
4874 * \brief Completions for values that resolve to an Objective-C object should
4875 * be included in the results.
4876 */
4877 CXCompletionContext_ObjCObjectValue = 1 << 2,
4878 /**
4879 * \brief Completions for values that resolve to an Objective-C selector
4880 * should be included in the results.
4881 */
4882 CXCompletionContext_ObjCSelectorValue = 1 << 3,
4883 /**
4884 * \brief Completions for values that resolve to a C++ class type should be
4885 * included in the results.
4886 */
4887 CXCompletionContext_CXXClassTypeValue = 1 << 4,
4888
4889 /**
4890 * \brief Completions for fields of the member being accessed using the dot
4891 * operator should be included in the results.
4892 */
4893 CXCompletionContext_DotMemberAccess = 1 << 5,
4894 /**
4895 * \brief Completions for fields of the member being accessed using the arrow
4896 * operator should be included in the results.
4897 */
4898 CXCompletionContext_ArrowMemberAccess = 1 << 6,
4899 /**
4900 * \brief Completions for properties of the Objective-C object being accessed
4901 * using the dot operator should be included in the results.
4902 */
4903 CXCompletionContext_ObjCPropertyAccess = 1 << 7,
4904
4905 /**
4906 * \brief Completions for enum tags should be included in the results.
4907 */
4908 CXCompletionContext_EnumTag = 1 << 8,
4909 /**
4910 * \brief Completions for union tags should be included in the results.
4911 */
4912 CXCompletionContext_UnionTag = 1 << 9,
4913 /**
4914 * \brief Completions for struct tags should be included in the results.
4915 */
4916 CXCompletionContext_StructTag = 1 << 10,
4917
4918 /**
4919 * \brief Completions for C++ class names should be included in the results.
4920 */
4921 CXCompletionContext_ClassTag = 1 << 11,
4922 /**
4923 * \brief Completions for C++ namespaces and namespace aliases should be
4924 * included in the results.
4925 */
4926 CXCompletionContext_Namespace = 1 << 12,
4927 /**
4928 * \brief Completions for C++ nested name specifiers should be included in
4929 * the results.
4930 */
4931 CXCompletionContext_NestedNameSpecifier = 1 << 13,
4932
4933 /**
4934 * \brief Completions for Objective-C interfaces (classes) should be included
4935 * in the results.
4936 */
4937 CXCompletionContext_ObjCInterface = 1 << 14,
4938 /**
4939 * \brief Completions for Objective-C protocols should be included in
4940 * the results.
4941 */
4942 CXCompletionContext_ObjCProtocol = 1 << 15,
4943 /**
4944 * \brief Completions for Objective-C categories should be included in
4945 * the results.
4946 */
4947 CXCompletionContext_ObjCCategory = 1 << 16,
4948 /**
4949 * \brief Completions for Objective-C instance messages should be included
4950 * in the results.
4951 */
4952 CXCompletionContext_ObjCInstanceMessage = 1 << 17,
4953 /**
4954 * \brief Completions for Objective-C class messages should be included in
4955 * the results.
4956 */
4957 CXCompletionContext_ObjCClassMessage = 1 << 18,
4958 /**
4959 * \brief Completions for Objective-C selector names should be included in
4960 * the results.
4961 */
4962 CXCompletionContext_ObjCSelectorName = 1 << 19,
4963
4964 /**
4965 * \brief Completions for preprocessor macro names should be included in
4966 * the results.
4967 */
4968 CXCompletionContext_MacroName = 1 << 20,
4969
4970 /**
4971 * \brief Natural language completions should be included in the results.
4972 */
4973 CXCompletionContext_NaturalLanguage = 1 << 21,
4974
4975 /**
4976 * \brief The current context is unknown, so set all contexts.
4977 */
4978 CXCompletionContext_Unknown = ((1 << 22) - 1)
4979};
4980
4981/**
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00004982 * \brief Returns a default set of code-completion options that can be
4983 * passed to\c clang_codeCompleteAt().
4984 */
4985CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultCodeCompleteOptions(void);
4986
4987/**
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00004988 * \brief Perform code completion at a given location in a translation unit.
4989 *
4990 * This function performs code completion at a particular file, line, and
4991 * column within source code, providing results that suggest potential
4992 * code snippets based on the context of the completion. The basic model
4993 * for code completion is that Clang will parse a complete source file,
4994 * performing syntax checking up to the location where code-completion has
4995 * been requested. At that point, a special code-completion token is passed
4996 * to the parser, which recognizes this token and determines, based on the
4997 * current location in the C/Objective-C/C++ grammar and the state of
4998 * semantic analysis, what completions to provide. These completions are
4999 * returned via a new \c CXCodeCompleteResults structure.
5000 *
5001 * Code completion itself is meant to be triggered by the client when the
5002 * user types punctuation characters or whitespace, at which point the
5003 * code-completion location will coincide with the cursor. For example, if \c p
5004 * is a pointer, code-completion might be triggered after the "-" and then
5005 * after the ">" in \c p->. When the code-completion location is afer the ">",
5006 * the completion results will provide, e.g., the members of the struct that
5007 * "p" points to. The client is responsible for placing the cursor at the
5008 * beginning of the token currently being typed, then filtering the results
5009 * based on the contents of the token. For example, when code-completing for
5010 * the expression \c p->get, the client should provide the location just after
5011 * the ">" (e.g., pointing at the "g") to this code-completion hook. Then, the
5012 * client can filter the results based on the current token text ("get"), only
5013 * showing those results that start with "get". The intent of this interface
5014 * is to separate the relatively high-latency acquisition of code-completion
5015 * results from the filtering of results on a per-character basis, which must
5016 * have a lower latency.
5017 *
5018 * \param TU The translation unit in which code-completion should
5019 * occur. The source files for this translation unit need not be
5020 * completely up-to-date (and the contents of those source files may
5021 * be overridden via \p unsaved_files). Cursors referring into the
5022 * translation unit may be invalidated by this invocation.
5023 *
5024 * \param complete_filename The name of the source file where code
5025 * completion should be performed. This filename may be any file
5026 * included in the translation unit.
5027 *
5028 * \param complete_line The line at which code-completion should occur.
5029 *
5030 * \param complete_column The column at which code-completion should occur.
5031 * Note that the column should point just after the syntactic construct that
5032 * initiated code completion, and not in the middle of a lexical token.
5033 *
Vedant Kumarcbfe7bb2016-03-23 23:51:36 +00005034 * \param unsaved_files the Files that have not yet been saved to disk
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00005035 * but may be required for parsing or code completion, including the
5036 * contents of those files. The contents and name of these files (as
5037 * specified by CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the
5038 * client only needs to guarantee their validity until the call to
5039 * this function returns.
5040 *
5041 * \param num_unsaved_files The number of unsaved file entries in \p
5042 * unsaved_files.
5043 *
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00005044 * \param options Extra options that control the behavior of code
5045 * completion, expressed as a bitwise OR of the enumerators of the
5046 * CXCodeComplete_Flags enumeration. The
5047 * \c clang_defaultCodeCompleteOptions() function returns a default set
5048 * of code-completion options.
5049 *
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00005050 * \returns If successful, a new \c CXCodeCompleteResults structure
5051 * containing code-completion results, which should eventually be
5052 * freed with \c clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults(). If code
5053 * completion fails, returns NULL.
5054 */
5055CINDEX_LINKAGE
5056CXCodeCompleteResults *clang_codeCompleteAt(CXTranslationUnit TU,
5057 const char *complete_filename,
5058 unsigned complete_line,
5059 unsigned complete_column,
5060 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
Douglas Gregorb68bc592010-08-05 09:09:23 +00005061 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
5062 unsigned options);
Douglas Gregor8e984da2010-08-04 16:47:14 +00005063
5064/**
Douglas Gregor49f67ce2010-08-26 13:48:20 +00005065 * \brief Sort the code-completion results in case-insensitive alphabetical
5066 * order.
5067 *
5068 * \param Results The set of results to sort.
5069 * \param NumResults The number of results in \p Results.
5070 */
5071CINDEX_LINKAGE
5072void clang_sortCodeCompletionResults(CXCompletionResult *Results,
5073 unsigned NumResults);
5074
5075/**
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00005076 * \brief Free the given set of code-completion results.
5077 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00005078CINDEX_LINKAGE
Douglas Gregorf72b6ac2009-12-18 16:20:58 +00005079void clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
Douglas Gregorf757a122010-08-23 23:00:57 +00005080
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +00005081/**
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00005082 * \brief Determine the number of diagnostics produced prior to the
5083 * location where code completion was performed.
5084 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00005085CINDEX_LINKAGE
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00005086unsigned clang_codeCompleteGetNumDiagnostics(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
5087
5088/**
5089 * \brief Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given code completion.
5090 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005091 * \param Results the code completion results to query.
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00005092 * \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve.
5093 *
5094 * \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed
5095 * via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic().
5096 */
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00005097CINDEX_LINKAGE
Douglas Gregor33cdd812010-02-18 18:08:43 +00005098CXDiagnostic clang_codeCompleteGetDiagnostic(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results,
5099 unsigned Index);
5100
5101/**
Nico Weberdd9c19f2014-04-24 03:06:18 +00005102 * \brief Determines what completions are appropriate for the context
Douglas Gregor21325842011-07-07 16:03:39 +00005103 * the given code completion.
5104 *
5105 * \param Results the code completion results to query
5106 *
5107 * \returns the kinds of completions that are appropriate for use
5108 * along with the given code completion results.
5109 */
5110CINDEX_LINKAGE
5111unsigned long long clang_codeCompleteGetContexts(
5112 CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
Douglas Gregor63745d52011-07-21 01:05:26 +00005113
5114/**
5115 * \brief Returns the cursor kind for the container for the current code
5116 * completion context. The container is only guaranteed to be set for
5117 * contexts where a container exists (i.e. member accesses or Objective-C
5118 * message sends); if there is not a container, this function will return
5119 * CXCursor_InvalidCode.
5120 *
5121 * \param Results the code completion results to query
5122 *
5123 * \param IsIncomplete on return, this value will be false if Clang has complete
5124 * information about the container. If Clang does not have complete
5125 * information, this value will be true.
5126 *
5127 * \returns the container kind, or CXCursor_InvalidCode if there is not a
5128 * container
5129 */
5130CINDEX_LINKAGE
5131enum CXCursorKind clang_codeCompleteGetContainerKind(
5132 CXCodeCompleteResults *Results,
5133 unsigned *IsIncomplete);
5134
5135/**
5136 * \brief Returns the USR for the container for the current code completion
5137 * context. If there is not a container for the current context, this
5138 * function will return the empty string.
5139 *
5140 * \param Results the code completion results to query
5141 *
5142 * \returns the USR for the container
5143 */
5144CINDEX_LINKAGE
5145CXString clang_codeCompleteGetContainerUSR(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
NAKAMURA Takumiaa13f942015-12-09 07:52:46 +00005146
Douglas Gregorea777402011-07-26 15:24:30 +00005147/**
5148 * \brief Returns the currently-entered selector for an Objective-C message
5149 * send, formatted like "initWithFoo:bar:". Only guaranteed to return a
5150 * non-empty string for CXCompletionContext_ObjCInstanceMessage and
5151 * CXCompletionContext_ObjCClassMessage.
5152 *
5153 * \param Results the code completion results to query
5154 *
5155 * \returns the selector (or partial selector) that has been entered thus far
5156 * for an Objective-C message send.
5157 */
5158CINDEX_LINKAGE
5159CXString clang_codeCompleteGetObjCSelector(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results);
5160
Douglas Gregor21325842011-07-07 16:03:39 +00005161/**
Douglas Gregor52606ff2010-01-20 01:10:47 +00005162 * @}
5163 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00005164
Ted Kremenekc0f3f722010-01-22 22:44:15 +00005165/**
5166 * \defgroup CINDEX_MISC Miscellaneous utility functions
5167 *
5168 * @{
5169 */
Ted Kremenek3e315a22010-01-23 17:51:23 +00005170
5171/**
5172 * \brief Return a version string, suitable for showing to a user, but not
5173 * intended to be parsed (the format is not guaranteed to be stable).
5174 */
NAKAMURA Takumieacd6672013-01-10 02:12:38 +00005175CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getClangVersion(void);
Ted Kremenekc0f3f722010-01-22 22:44:15 +00005176
Ted Kremenek1ec7b332011-03-18 23:05:39 +00005177/**
5178 * \brief Enable/disable crash recovery.
5179 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005180 * \param isEnabled Flag to indicate if crash recovery is enabled. A non-zero
5181 * value enables crash recovery, while 0 disables it.
Ted Kremenek1ec7b332011-03-18 23:05:39 +00005182 */
5183CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_toggleCrashRecovery(unsigned isEnabled);
5184
Ted Kremenek0b86e3a2010-01-26 19:31:51 +00005185 /**
Ted Kremenekd071c602010-03-13 02:50:34 +00005186 * \brief Visitor invoked for each file in a translation unit
Ted Kremenek0b86e3a2010-01-26 19:31:51 +00005187 * (used with clang_getInclusions()).
5188 *
5189 * This visitor function will be invoked by clang_getInclusions() for each
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005190 * file included (either at the top-level or by \#include directives) within
Ted Kremenek0b86e3a2010-01-26 19:31:51 +00005191 * a translation unit. The first argument is the file being included, and
5192 * the second and third arguments provide the inclusion stack. The
5193 * array is sorted in order of immediate inclusion. For example,
5194 * the first element refers to the location that included 'included_file'.
5195 */
5196typedef void (*CXInclusionVisitor)(CXFile included_file,
5197 CXSourceLocation* inclusion_stack,
5198 unsigned include_len,
5199 CXClientData client_data);
5200
5201/**
5202 * \brief Visit the set of preprocessor inclusions in a translation unit.
5203 * The visitor function is called with the provided data for every included
5204 * file. This does not include headers included by the PCH file (unless one
5205 * is inspecting the inclusions in the PCH file itself).
5206 */
5207CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getInclusions(CXTranslationUnit tu,
5208 CXInclusionVisitor visitor,
5209 CXClientData client_data);
5210
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00005211typedef enum {
5212 CXEval_Int = 1 ,
5213 CXEval_Float = 2,
5214 CXEval_ObjCStrLiteral = 3,
5215 CXEval_StrLiteral = 4,
5216 CXEval_CFStr = 5,
5217 CXEval_Other = 6,
5218
5219 CXEval_UnExposed = 0
5220
5221} CXEvalResultKind ;
5222
5223/**
5224 * \brief Evaluation result of a cursor
5225 */
5226typedef void * CXEvalResult;
5227
5228/**
5229 * \brief If cursor is a statement declaration tries to evaluate the
5230 * statement and if its variable, tries to evaluate its initializer,
5231 * into its corresponding type.
5232 */
5233CINDEX_LINKAGE CXEvalResult clang_Cursor_Evaluate(CXCursor C);
5234
5235/**
5236 * \brief Returns the kind of the evaluated result.
5237 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisa851d7e2016-01-16 03:01:20 +00005238CINDEX_LINKAGE CXEvalResultKind clang_EvalResult_getKind(CXEvalResult E);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00005239
5240/**
5241 * \brief Returns the evaluation result as integer if the
5242 * kind is Int.
5243 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisa851d7e2016-01-16 03:01:20 +00005244CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_EvalResult_getAsInt(CXEvalResult E);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00005245
5246/**
5247 * \brief Returns the evaluation result as double if the
5248 * kind is double.
5249 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisa851d7e2016-01-16 03:01:20 +00005250CINDEX_LINKAGE double clang_EvalResult_getAsDouble(CXEvalResult E);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00005251
5252/**
5253 * \brief Returns the evaluation result as a constant string if the
5254 * kind is other than Int or float. User must not free this pointer,
5255 * instead call clang_EvalResult_dispose on the CXEvalResult returned
5256 * by clang_Cursor_Evaluate.
5257 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisa851d7e2016-01-16 03:01:20 +00005258CINDEX_LINKAGE const char* clang_EvalResult_getAsStr(CXEvalResult E);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis785705b2016-01-16 00:20:02 +00005259
5260/**
5261 * \brief Disposes the created Eval memory.
5262 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisa851d7e2016-01-16 03:01:20 +00005263CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_EvalResult_dispose(CXEvalResult E);
Ted Kremenek0b86e3a2010-01-26 19:31:51 +00005264/**
Ted Kremenekc0f3f722010-01-22 22:44:15 +00005265 * @}
5266 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00005267
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf89cc692011-07-11 20:15:00 +00005268/** \defgroup CINDEX_REMAPPING Remapping functions
5269 *
5270 * @{
5271 */
5272
5273/**
5274 * \brief A remapping of original source files and their translated files.
5275 */
5276typedef void *CXRemapping;
5277
5278/**
5279 * \brief Retrieve a remapping.
5280 *
5281 * \param path the path that contains metadata about remappings.
5282 *
5283 * \returns the requested remapping. This remapping must be freed
5284 * via a call to \c clang_remap_dispose(). Can return NULL if an error occurred.
5285 */
5286CINDEX_LINKAGE CXRemapping clang_getRemappings(const char *path);
5287
5288/**
Ted Kremenekf7639e12012-03-06 20:06:33 +00005289 * \brief Retrieve a remapping.
5290 *
5291 * \param filePaths pointer to an array of file paths containing remapping info.
5292 *
5293 * \param numFiles number of file paths.
5294 *
5295 * \returns the requested remapping. This remapping must be freed
5296 * via a call to \c clang_remap_dispose(). Can return NULL if an error occurred.
5297 */
5298CINDEX_LINKAGE
5299CXRemapping clang_getRemappingsFromFileList(const char **filePaths,
5300 unsigned numFiles);
5301
5302/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisf89cc692011-07-11 20:15:00 +00005303 * \brief Determine the number of remappings.
5304 */
5305CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_remap_getNumFiles(CXRemapping);
5306
5307/**
5308 * \brief Get the original and the associated filename from the remapping.
5309 *
5310 * \param original If non-NULL, will be set to the original filename.
5311 *
5312 * \param transformed If non-NULL, will be set to the filename that the original
5313 * is associated with.
5314 */
5315CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_remap_getFilenames(CXRemapping, unsigned index,
5316 CXString *original, CXString *transformed);
5317
5318/**
5319 * \brief Dispose the remapping.
5320 */
5321CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_remap_dispose(CXRemapping);
5322
5323/**
5324 * @}
5325 */
5326
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005327/** \defgroup CINDEX_HIGH Higher level API functions
5328 *
5329 * @{
5330 */
5331
5332enum CXVisitorResult {
5333 CXVisit_Break,
5334 CXVisit_Continue
5335};
5336
Saleem Abdulrasoolec988b72016-05-24 01:23:24 +00005337typedef struct CXCursorAndRangeVisitor {
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005338 void *context;
5339 enum CXVisitorResult (*visit)(void *context, CXCursor, CXSourceRange);
5340} CXCursorAndRangeVisitor;
5341
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005342typedef enum {
5343 /**
5344 * \brief Function returned successfully.
5345 */
5346 CXResult_Success = 0,
5347 /**
5348 * \brief One of the parameters was invalid for the function.
5349 */
5350 CXResult_Invalid = 1,
5351 /**
5352 * \brief The function was terminated by a callback (e.g. it returned
5353 * CXVisit_Break)
5354 */
5355 CXResult_VisitBreak = 2
5356
5357} CXResult;
5358
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005359/**
5360 * \brief Find references of a declaration in a specific file.
5361 *
5362 * \param cursor pointing to a declaration or a reference of one.
5363 *
5364 * \param file to search for references.
5365 *
5366 * \param visitor callback that will receive pairs of CXCursor/CXSourceRange for
5367 * each reference found.
5368 * The CXSourceRange will point inside the file; if the reference is inside
5369 * a macro (and not a macro argument) the CXSourceRange will be invalid.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis951f61f2013-03-08 20:42:33 +00005370 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005371 * \returns one of the CXResult enumerators.
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005372 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005373CINDEX_LINKAGE CXResult clang_findReferencesInFile(CXCursor cursor, CXFile file,
5374 CXCursorAndRangeVisitor visitor);
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005375
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005376/**
5377 * \brief Find #import/#include directives in a specific file.
5378 *
5379 * \param TU translation unit containing the file to query.
5380 *
5381 * \param file to search for #import/#include directives.
5382 *
5383 * \param visitor callback that will receive pairs of CXCursor/CXSourceRange for
5384 * each directive found.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis951f61f2013-03-08 20:42:33 +00005385 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005386 * \returns one of the CXResult enumerators.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005387 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005388CINDEX_LINKAGE CXResult clang_findIncludesInFile(CXTranslationUnit TU,
5389 CXFile file,
5390 CXCursorAndRangeVisitor visitor);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005391
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005392#ifdef __has_feature
5393# if __has_feature(blocks)
5394
5395typedef enum CXVisitorResult
5396 (^CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock)(CXCursor, CXSourceRange);
5397
5398CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005399CXResult clang_findReferencesInFileWithBlock(CXCursor, CXFile,
5400 CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock);
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005401
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005402CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis51c33182013-03-08 22:47:41 +00005403CXResult clang_findIncludesInFileWithBlock(CXTranslationUnit, CXFile,
5404 CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis503c83a2013-03-08 02:32:34 +00005405
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005406# endif
5407#endif
5408
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005409/**
5410 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with a CXFile.
5411 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005412typedef void *CXIdxClientFile;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005413
5414/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005415 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with a semantic entity.
5416 */
5417typedef void *CXIdxClientEntity;
5418
5419/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005420 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with a semantic container
5421 * of entities.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005422 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005423typedef void *CXIdxClientContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005424
5425/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005426 * \brief The client's data object that is associated with an AST file (PCH
5427 * or module).
5428 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005429typedef void *CXIdxClientASTFile;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005430
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005431/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005432 * \brief Source location passed to index callbacks.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005433 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005434typedef struct {
5435 void *ptr_data[2];
5436 unsigned int_data;
5437} CXIdxLoc;
5438
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005439/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005440 * \brief Data for ppIncludedFile callback.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005441 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005442typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005443 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005444 * \brief Location of '#' in the \#include/\#import directive.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005445 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005446 CXIdxLoc hashLoc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005447 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005448 * \brief Filename as written in the \#include/\#import directive.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005449 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005450 const char *filename;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005451 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005452 * \brief The actual file that the \#include/\#import directive resolved to.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005453 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005454 CXFile file;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005455 int isImport;
5456 int isAngled;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis5e2ec482012-10-18 00:17:05 +00005457 /**
5458 * \brief Non-zero if the directive was automatically turned into a module
5459 * import.
5460 */
5461 int isModuleImport;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005462} CXIdxIncludedFileInfo;
5463
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005464/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005465 * \brief Data for IndexerCallbacks#importedASTFile.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005466 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005467typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005468 /**
5469 * \brief Top level AST file containing the imported PCH, module or submodule.
5470 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005471 CXFile file;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005472 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc78f3e2012-10-05 00:22:40 +00005473 * \brief The imported module or NULL if the AST file is a PCH.
5474 */
5475 CXModule module;
5476 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005477 * \brief Location where the file is imported. Applicable only for modules.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005478 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005479 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005480 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005481 * \brief Non-zero if an inclusion directive was automatically turned into
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc78f3e2012-10-05 00:22:40 +00005482 * a module import. Applicable only for modules.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005483 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis184b1442012-10-03 21:05:44 +00005484 int isImplicit;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005485
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005486} CXIdxImportedASTFileInfo;
5487
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005488typedef enum {
5489 CXIdxEntity_Unexposed = 0,
5490 CXIdxEntity_Typedef = 1,
5491 CXIdxEntity_Function = 2,
5492 CXIdxEntity_Variable = 3,
5493 CXIdxEntity_Field = 4,
5494 CXIdxEntity_EnumConstant = 5,
5495
5496 CXIdxEntity_ObjCClass = 6,
5497 CXIdxEntity_ObjCProtocol = 7,
5498 CXIdxEntity_ObjCCategory = 8,
5499
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005500 CXIdxEntity_ObjCInstanceMethod = 9,
5501 CXIdxEntity_ObjCClassMethod = 10,
5502 CXIdxEntity_ObjCProperty = 11,
5503 CXIdxEntity_ObjCIvar = 12,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005504
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005505 CXIdxEntity_Enum = 13,
5506 CXIdxEntity_Struct = 14,
5507 CXIdxEntity_Union = 15,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005508
5509 CXIdxEntity_CXXClass = 16,
5510 CXIdxEntity_CXXNamespace = 17,
5511 CXIdxEntity_CXXNamespaceAlias = 18,
5512 CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticVariable = 19,
5513 CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticMethod = 20,
5514 CXIdxEntity_CXXInstanceMethod = 21,
Joao Matose9a3ed42012-08-31 22:18:20 +00005515 CXIdxEntity_CXXConstructor = 22,
5516 CXIdxEntity_CXXDestructor = 23,
5517 CXIdxEntity_CXXConversionFunction = 24,
5518 CXIdxEntity_CXXTypeAlias = 25,
5519 CXIdxEntity_CXXInterface = 26
5520
5521} CXIdxEntityKind;
5522
Argyrios Kyrtzidis52002882011-12-07 20:44:12 +00005523typedef enum {
5524 CXIdxEntityLang_None = 0,
5525 CXIdxEntityLang_C = 1,
5526 CXIdxEntityLang_ObjC = 2,
5527 CXIdxEntityLang_CXX = 3
5528} CXIdxEntityLanguage;
5529
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005530/**
5531 * \brief Extra C++ template information for an entity. This can apply to:
5532 * CXIdxEntity_Function
5533 * CXIdxEntity_CXXClass
5534 * CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticMethod
5535 * CXIdxEntity_CXXInstanceMethod
5536 * CXIdxEntity_CXXConstructor
5537 * CXIdxEntity_CXXConversionFunction
5538 * CXIdxEntity_CXXTypeAlias
5539 */
5540typedef enum {
5541 CXIdxEntity_NonTemplate = 0,
5542 CXIdxEntity_Template = 1,
5543 CXIdxEntity_TemplatePartialSpecialization = 2,
5544 CXIdxEntity_TemplateSpecialization = 3
5545} CXIdxEntityCXXTemplateKind;
5546
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005547typedef enum {
5548 CXIdxAttr_Unexposed = 0,
5549 CXIdxAttr_IBAction = 1,
5550 CXIdxAttr_IBOutlet = 2,
5551 CXIdxAttr_IBOutletCollection = 3
5552} CXIdxAttrKind;
5553
5554typedef struct {
5555 CXIdxAttrKind kind;
5556 CXCursor cursor;
5557 CXIdxLoc loc;
5558} CXIdxAttrInfo;
5559
5560typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4d873b72011-12-15 00:05:00 +00005561 CXIdxEntityKind kind;
5562 CXIdxEntityCXXTemplateKind templateKind;
5563 CXIdxEntityLanguage lang;
5564 const char *name;
5565 const char *USR;
5566 CXCursor cursor;
5567 const CXIdxAttrInfo *const *attributes;
5568 unsigned numAttributes;
5569} CXIdxEntityInfo;
5570
5571typedef struct {
5572 CXCursor cursor;
5573} CXIdxContainerInfo;
5574
5575typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005576 const CXIdxAttrInfo *attrInfo;
5577 const CXIdxEntityInfo *objcClass;
5578 CXCursor classCursor;
5579 CXIdxLoc classLoc;
5580} CXIdxIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo;
5581
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005582typedef enum {
5583 CXIdxDeclFlag_Skipped = 0x1
5584} CXIdxDeclInfoFlags;
5585
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005586typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005587 const CXIdxEntityInfo *entityInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005588 CXCursor cursor;
5589 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis663c8ec2011-12-07 20:44:19 +00005590 const CXIdxContainerInfo *semanticContainer;
5591 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005592 * \brief Generally same as #semanticContainer but can be different in
Argyrios Kyrtzidis663c8ec2011-12-07 20:44:19 +00005593 * cases like out-of-line C++ member functions.
5594 */
5595 const CXIdxContainerInfo *lexicalContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005596 int isRedeclaration;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005597 int isDefinition;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005598 int isContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005599 const CXIdxContainerInfo *declAsContainer;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005600 /**
5601 * \brief Whether the declaration exists in code or was created implicitly
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00005602 * by the compiler, e.g. implicit Objective-C methods for properties.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005603 */
5604 int isImplicit;
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005605 const CXIdxAttrInfo *const *attributes;
5606 unsigned numAttributes;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005607
5608 unsigned flags;
5609
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005610} CXIdxDeclInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005611
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005612typedef enum {
5613 CXIdxObjCContainer_ForwardRef = 0,
5614 CXIdxObjCContainer_Interface = 1,
5615 CXIdxObjCContainer_Implementation = 2
5616} CXIdxObjCContainerKind;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005617
5618typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005619 const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005620 CXIdxObjCContainerKind kind;
5621} CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005622
5623typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005624 const CXIdxEntityInfo *base;
5625 CXCursor cursor;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005626 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005627} CXIdxBaseClassInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005628
5629typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005630 const CXIdxEntityInfo *protocol;
5631 CXCursor cursor;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005632 CXIdxLoc loc;
5633} CXIdxObjCProtocolRefInfo;
5634
5635typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005636 const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefInfo *const *protocols;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005637 unsigned numProtocols;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005638} CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005639
5640typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005641 const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *containerInfo;
5642 const CXIdxBaseClassInfo *superInfo;
5643 const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *protocols;
5644} CXIdxObjCInterfaceDeclInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005645
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005646typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis9b9f7a92011-12-13 18:47:45 +00005647 const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *containerInfo;
5648 const CXIdxEntityInfo *objcClass;
5649 CXCursor classCursor;
5650 CXIdxLoc classLoc;
5651 const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *protocols;
5652} CXIdxObjCCategoryDeclInfo;
5653
5654typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005655 const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis93db2922012-02-28 17:50:33 +00005656 const CXIdxEntityInfo *getter;
5657 const CXIdxEntityInfo *setter;
5658} CXIdxObjCPropertyDeclInfo;
5659
5660typedef struct {
5661 const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005662 const CXIdxBaseClassInfo *const *bases;
5663 unsigned numBases;
5664} CXIdxCXXClassDeclInfo;
5665
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005666/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005667 * \brief Data for IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005668 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c7735e52011-10-18 15:50:50 +00005669typedef enum {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005670 /**
5671 * \brief The entity is referenced directly in user's code.
5672 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c7735e52011-10-18 15:50:50 +00005673 CXIdxEntityRef_Direct = 1,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005674 /**
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00005675 * \brief An implicit reference, e.g. a reference of an Objective-C method
5676 * via the dot syntax.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005677 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005678 CXIdxEntityRef_Implicit = 2
Argyrios Kyrtzidis0c7735e52011-10-18 15:50:50 +00005679} CXIdxEntityRefKind;
5680
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005681/**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005682 * \brief Data for IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005683 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005684typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis663c8ec2011-12-07 20:44:19 +00005685 CXIdxEntityRefKind kind;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005686 /**
5687 * \brief Reference cursor.
5688 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005689 CXCursor cursor;
5690 CXIdxLoc loc;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005691 /**
5692 * \brief The entity that gets referenced.
5693 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005694 const CXIdxEntityInfo *referencedEntity;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005695 /**
5696 * \brief Immediate "parent" of the reference. For example:
5697 *
5698 * \code
5699 * Foo *var;
5700 * \endcode
5701 *
5702 * The parent of reference of type 'Foo' is the variable 'var'.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis25cb0ff2011-12-13 18:47:41 +00005703 * For references inside statement bodies of functions/methods,
5704 * the parentEntity will be the function/method.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005705 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005706 const CXIdxEntityInfo *parentEntity;
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005707 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis25cb0ff2011-12-13 18:47:41 +00005708 * \brief Lexical container context of the reference.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005709 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005710 const CXIdxContainerInfo *container;
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005711} CXIdxEntityRefInfo;
5712
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005713/**
5714 * \brief A group of callbacks used by #clang_indexSourceFile and
5715 * #clang_indexTranslationUnit.
5716 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005717typedef struct {
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005718 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005719 * \brief Called periodically to check whether indexing should be aborted.
5720 * Should return 0 to continue, and non-zero to abort.
5721 */
5722 int (*abortQuery)(CXClientData client_data, void *reserved);
5723
5724 /**
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005725 * \brief Called at the end of indexing; passes the complete diagnostic set.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005726 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005727 void (*diagnostic)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005728 CXDiagnosticSet, void *reserved);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005729
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005730 CXIdxClientFile (*enteredMainFile)(CXClientData client_data,
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005731 CXFile mainFile, void *reserved);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005732
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005733 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005734 * \brief Called when a file gets \#included/\#imported.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005735 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005736 CXIdxClientFile (*ppIncludedFile)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005737 const CXIdxIncludedFileInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005738
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005739 /**
5740 * \brief Called when a AST file (PCH or module) gets imported.
5741 *
5742 * AST files will not get indexed (there will not be callbacks to index all
5743 * the entities in an AST file). The recommended action is that, if the AST
Argyrios Kyrtzidis472eda02012-10-02 16:10:38 +00005744 * file is not already indexed, to initiate a new indexing job specific to
5745 * the AST file.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005746 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005747 CXIdxClientASTFile (*importedASTFile)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005748 const CXIdxImportedASTFileInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005749
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005750 /**
5751 * \brief Called at the beginning of indexing a translation unit.
5752 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005753 CXIdxClientContainer (*startedTranslationUnit)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005754 void *reserved);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005755
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005756 void (*indexDeclaration)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005757 const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005758
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005759 /**
5760 * \brief Called to index a reference of an entity.
5761 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005762 void (*indexEntityReference)(CXClientData client_data,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005763 const CXIdxEntityRefInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005764
5765} IndexerCallbacks;
5766
NAKAMURA Takumiaacef7e2011-11-11 02:51:09 +00005767CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_index_isEntityObjCContainerKind(CXIdxEntityKind);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005768CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *
5769clang_index_getObjCContainerDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005770
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005771CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCInterfaceDeclInfo *
5772clang_index_getObjCInterfaceDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
5773
NAKAMURA Takumiaacef7e2011-11-11 02:51:09 +00005774CINDEX_LINKAGE
Argyrios Kyrtzidis3e429e72011-11-12 02:16:30 +00005775const CXIdxObjCCategoryDeclInfo *
5776clang_index_getObjCCategoryDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
5777
Argyrios Kyrtzidis86acd722011-11-14 22:39:19 +00005778CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *
5779clang_index_getObjCProtocolRefListInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005780
Argyrios Kyrtzidis93db2922012-02-28 17:50:33 +00005781CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCPropertyDeclInfo *
5782clang_index_getObjCPropertyDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
5783
Argyrios Kyrtzidiseffdbf52011-11-18 00:26:51 +00005784CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo *
5785clang_index_getIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo(const CXIdxAttrInfo *);
5786
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005787CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxCXXClassDeclInfo *
5788clang_index_getCXXClassDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *);
5789
5790/**
5791 * \brief For retrieving a custom CXIdxClientContainer attached to a
5792 * container.
5793 */
5794CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIdxClientContainer
5795clang_index_getClientContainer(const CXIdxContainerInfo *);
5796
5797/**
5798 * \brief For setting a custom CXIdxClientContainer attached to a
5799 * container.
5800 */
5801CINDEX_LINKAGE void
5802clang_index_setClientContainer(const CXIdxContainerInfo *,CXIdxClientContainer);
5803
5804/**
5805 * \brief For retrieving a custom CXIdxClientEntity attached to an entity.
5806 */
5807CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIdxClientEntity
5808clang_index_getClientEntity(const CXIdxEntityInfo *);
5809
5810/**
5811 * \brief For setting a custom CXIdxClientEntity attached to an entity.
5812 */
5813CINDEX_LINKAGE void
5814clang_index_setClientEntity(const CXIdxEntityInfo *, CXIdxClientEntity);
5815
5816/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005817 * \brief An indexing action/session, to be applied to one or multiple
5818 * translation units.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005819 */
5820typedef void *CXIndexAction;
5821
5822/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005823 * \brief An indexing action/session, to be applied to one or multiple
5824 * translation units.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005825 *
5826 * \param CIdx The index object with which the index action will be associated.
5827 */
5828CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIndexAction clang_IndexAction_create(CXIndex CIdx);
5829
5830/**
5831 * \brief Destroy the given index action.
5832 *
5833 * The index action must not be destroyed until all of the translation units
5834 * created within that index action have been destroyed.
5835 */
5836CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_IndexAction_dispose(CXIndexAction);
5837
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005838typedef enum {
5839 /**
5840 * \brief Used to indicate that no special indexing options are needed.
5841 */
5842 CXIndexOpt_None = 0x0,
5843
5844 /**
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005845 * \brief Used to indicate that IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference should
5846 * be invoked for only one reference of an entity per source file that does
5847 * not also include a declaration/definition of the entity.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005848 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisfb7d1452012-01-14 00:11:49 +00005849 CXIndexOpt_SuppressRedundantRefs = 0x1,
5850
5851 /**
5852 * \brief Function-local symbols should be indexed. If this is not set
5853 * function-local symbols will be ignored.
5854 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7e747952012-02-14 22:23:11 +00005855 CXIndexOpt_IndexFunctionLocalSymbols = 0x2,
5856
5857 /**
5858 * \brief Implicit function/class template instantiations should be indexed.
5859 * If this is not set, implicit instantiations will be ignored.
5860 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis6c9ed7d2012-03-27 21:38:03 +00005861 CXIndexOpt_IndexImplicitTemplateInstantiations = 0x4,
5862
5863 /**
5864 * \brief Suppress all compiler warnings when parsing for indexing.
5865 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005866 CXIndexOpt_SuppressWarnings = 0x8,
5867
5868 /**
5869 * \brief Skip a function/method body that was already parsed during an
Nico Weber7deebef2014-04-24 03:17:47 +00005870 * indexing session associated with a \c CXIndexAction object.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis8b71bc72012-12-06 19:41:16 +00005871 * Bodies in system headers are always skipped.
5872 */
5873 CXIndexOpt_SkipParsedBodiesInSession = 0x10
5874
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005875} CXIndexOptFlags;
5876
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005877/**
5878 * \brief Index the given source file and the translation unit corresponding
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005879 * to that file via callbacks implemented through #IndexerCallbacks.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005880 *
5881 * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will
5882 * be passed to the invoked callbacks.
5883 *
5884 * \param index_callbacks Pointer to indexing callbacks that the client
5885 * implements.
5886 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005887 * \param index_callbacks_size Size of #IndexerCallbacks structure that gets
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005888 * passed in index_callbacks.
5889 *
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005890 * \param index_options A bitmask of options that affects how indexing is
5891 * performed. This should be a bitwise OR of the CXIndexOpt_XXX flags.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005892 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00005893 * \param[out] out_TU pointer to store a \c CXTranslationUnit that can be
5894 * reused after indexing is finished. Set to \c NULL if you do not require it.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005895 *
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00005896 * \returns 0 on success or if there were errors from which the compiler could
Eric Christopher2c4555a2015-06-19 01:52:53 +00005897 * recover. If there is a failure from which there is no recovery, returns
Dmitri Gribenkoea4d1c32014-02-12 19:12:37 +00005898 * a non-zero \c CXErrorCode.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005899 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005900 * The rest of the parameters are the same as #clang_parseTranslationUnit.
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005901 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005902CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexSourceFile(CXIndexAction,
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005903 CXClientData client_data,
5904 IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks,
5905 unsigned index_callbacks_size,
5906 unsigned index_options,
5907 const char *source_filename,
5908 const char * const *command_line_args,
5909 int num_command_line_args,
5910 struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
5911 unsigned num_unsaved_files,
5912 CXTranslationUnit *out_TU,
5913 unsigned TU_options);
5914
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005915/**
Benjamin Kramerc02670e2015-11-18 16:14:27 +00005916 * \brief Same as clang_indexSourceFile but requires a full command line
5917 * for \c command_line_args including argv[0]. This is useful if the standard
5918 * library paths are relative to the binary.
5919 */
5920CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexSourceFileFullArgv(
5921 CXIndexAction, CXClientData client_data, IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks,
5922 unsigned index_callbacks_size, unsigned index_options,
5923 const char *source_filename, const char *const *command_line_args,
5924 int num_command_line_args, struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files,
5925 unsigned num_unsaved_files, CXTranslationUnit *out_TU, unsigned TU_options);
5926
5927/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005928 * \brief Index the given translation unit via callbacks implemented through
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005929 * #IndexerCallbacks.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005930 *
5931 * The order of callback invocations is not guaranteed to be the same as
5932 * when indexing a source file. The high level order will be:
5933 *
5934 * -Preprocessor callbacks invocations
5935 * -Declaration/reference callbacks invocations
5936 * -Diagnostic callback invocations
5937 *
James Dennett574cb4c2012-06-15 05:41:51 +00005938 * The parameters are the same as #clang_indexSourceFile.
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005939 *
Eric Christopher2c4555a2015-06-19 01:52:53 +00005940 * \returns If there is a failure from which there is no recovery, returns
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005941 * non-zero, otherwise returns 0.
5942 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005943CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexTranslationUnit(CXIndexAction,
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005944 CXClientData client_data,
5945 IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks,
5946 unsigned index_callbacks_size,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis4c910b12011-11-22 07:24:51 +00005947 unsigned index_options,
5948 CXTranslationUnit);
Argyrios Kyrtzidisd992e142011-11-15 06:20:16 +00005949
5950/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005951 * \brief Retrieve the CXIdxFile, file, line, column, and offset represented by
5952 * the given CXIdxLoc.
5953 *
5954 * If the location refers into a macro expansion, retrieves the
5955 * location of the macro expansion and if it refers into a macro argument
5956 * retrieves the location of the argument.
5957 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005958CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_indexLoc_getFileLocation(CXIdxLoc loc,
Argyrios Kyrtzidis7519c5e2011-11-11 00:23:36 +00005959 CXIdxClientFile *indexFile,
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005960 CXFile *file,
5961 unsigned *line,
5962 unsigned *column,
5963 unsigned *offset);
5964
Argyrios Kyrtzidis11d61142011-10-27 17:36:12 +00005965/**
5966 * \brief Retrieve the CXSourceLocation represented by the given CXIdxLoc.
5967 */
Argyrios Kyrtzidisdc199a32011-10-17 19:48:19 +00005968CINDEX_LINKAGE
5969CXSourceLocation clang_indexLoc_getCXSourceLocation(CXIdxLoc loc);
5970
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00005971/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2bff5162015-04-13 16:55:04 +00005972 * \brief Visitor invoked for each field found by a traversal.
5973 *
5974 * This visitor function will be invoked for each field found by
5975 * \c clang_Type_visitFields. Its first argument is the cursor being
5976 * visited, its second argument is the client data provided to
5977 * \c clang_Type_visitFields.
5978 *
5979 * The visitor should return one of the \c CXVisitorResult values
5980 * to direct \c clang_Type_visitFields.
5981 */
5982typedef enum CXVisitorResult (*CXFieldVisitor)(CXCursor C,
5983 CXClientData client_data);
5984
5985/**
5986 * \brief Visit the fields of a particular type.
5987 *
5988 * This function visits all the direct fields of the given cursor,
5989 * invoking the given \p visitor function with the cursors of each
5990 * visited field. The traversal may be ended prematurely, if
5991 * the visitor returns \c CXFieldVisit_Break.
5992 *
5993 * \param T the record type whose field may be visited.
5994 *
5995 * \param visitor the visitor function that will be invoked for each
5996 * field of \p T.
5997 *
5998 * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will
5999 * be passed to the visitor each time it is invoked.
6000 *
6001 * \returns a non-zero value if the traversal was terminated
6002 * prematurely by the visitor returning \c CXFieldVisit_Break.
6003 */
6004CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Type_visitFields(CXType T,
6005 CXFieldVisitor visitor,
6006 CXClientData client_data);
6007
Argyrios Kyrtzidis2bff5162015-04-13 16:55:04 +00006008/**
Argyrios Kyrtzidiscddafd32011-10-06 07:00:54 +00006009 * @}
6010 */
6011
Douglas Gregor6007cf22010-01-22 22:29:16 +00006012/**
6013 * @}
6014 */
Daniel Dunbar62ebf252010-01-24 02:54:26 +00006015
Ted Kremenekb60d87c2009-08-26 22:36:44 +00006016#ifdef __cplusplus
6017}
6018#endif
6019#endif